JP7806873B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured so that an internal lottery is held when certain lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Specifically, with regard to slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop as a result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to optimize the game progress in the gaming machines exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimize game progress.

The present invention provides
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bet amount operation means for performing a bet amount operation to set the game value as the bet amount for a game;
a bet amount setting means for setting a bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, based on the operation of the start operation means;
a granting means for granting a benefit corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means as a gaming value;
a storage means capable of storing the game value awarded by the awarding means;
a settlement operation means for performing a settlement operation of the game value stored in the storage means;
a means for switching the notification mode of the specific notification means from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when the bet number operation is performed;
Equipped with
During the settlement of the game value based on the settlement operation, the notification mode of the specific notification means can be switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode , and even after the notification mode of the specific notification means is switched to the second notification mode, the settlement of the game value that was being executed before the switching continues,
A configuration capable of executing a predetermined notification corresponding to the settlement of the gaming value based on the settlement operation,
The device is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the predetermined notification in a situation where the settlement of the gaming value that was being executed before the switch continues .

This invention makes it possible to optimize game progress.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a bonus state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal AT mode lottery process. 10 is a flowchart showing the AT mode lottery processing for CZ. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a precursory mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of various transition lottery tables. A figure showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an immediate notification lottery table. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of a CZ mode game number table and a premonition effect game number table. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT top-up process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing buttons. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first number-of-games management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second game count management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. A flowchart showing processing for advantageous zone transition games. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of transition relationships between display modes. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display on the zone indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a game status display section and a bet display section. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a BET process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting replay. 10 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first operation response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second operation response process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a game status display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a single bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing consecutive bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a bet effect setting process for a re-play state. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo-bet effects are restricted. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo-bet effects are restricted. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby state setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 10 is a timing chart for explaining a provisional standby state and a standby state. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo-bet effects are restricted in Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the start effect and the pseudo-bet effect in Modification 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. A flowchart showing the setting process for the push order notification effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific re-game bet effect setting process in Modification 3. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the pseudo-bet effect and the freeze effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a freeze lottery process. 13 is a timing chart for explaining pseudo-bet effects according to types of bet number operations in Modification 4. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific re-play bet effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a standby state setting process in Modification 5. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 10 is a timing chart for explaining a provisional standby state and a standby state. 13 is a flowchart showing a medal return process in Modification 6. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of producing a presentation when returning a vehicle. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between credit settlement and pseudo bet effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific re-game bet effect setting process in Modification Example 7.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., the first symbol on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., the zeroth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., the fourteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., the second symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., the eighth symbol on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., the ninth symbol on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., the third symbol on the left reel 32L), "Youth" (e.g., the eighteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" (e.g., the fourth symbol on the left reel 32L), and "White Shell" (e.g., the nineteenth symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the middle symbol on the left reel 32L, the top symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the game may start with either three medals bet or two medals bet. When the game starts with either three or two medals bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. Also, hereinafter, a game that starts with three medals bet will be referred to as a three-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet will be referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet will be referred to as a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize win through the 32nd small prize win.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line sloping downward to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the second small win is achieved. When the second small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first small win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fourth small win is achieved. When the fourth small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the fourth small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in line on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first to third small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 5th small win is achieved. When the 5th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 1st to 4th small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols line up.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 6th small win is achieved. When the 6th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small win stops on the pay line ML, "bell" symbols stop (forming a small hill) on the bottom of the left reel 32L, the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the bottom of the right reel 32R. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand, from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbols, that a small win different from the first to fifth small wins described above has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 7th small win is achieved. When the 7th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small win is achieved. When the 8th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th small win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in alignment on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 7th small win has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned.

The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are so-called missed combinations, which are mainly awarded when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol or "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not stop aligned on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that a minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 32nd small wins, the paid out small wins are a type of bonus awarded depending on the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of inserted (betted) medals may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

Winnings that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winnings through the 12th replay winnings. As shown in Figure 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay through the 12th replay.

A first replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "white shell" or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a replay win corresponding to the replay has occurred.

A second replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to a second replay win stops on the active line ML, as shown in Figure 14(a), the "BAR" symbols may stop aligned on the upward-sloping line L5, or as shown in Figure 14(b), the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "BAR" symbol may stop on the upward-sloping line L5 in order from left to right. When a second replay win occurs, the game state does not change, but a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the first AT state, a so-called pseudo-bonus, begins.

A third replay win is achieved when the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to the third replay win stops on the active line ML, as shown in Figure 14(c), "white 7" symbols may stop in a line on the bottom line L3, or as shown in Figure 14(d), "red 7" symbols may stop in a line on the downward-sloping right line L4. When a third replay win is achieved, the game state does not change, but a transition to a notification mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the second AT state, a so-called pseudo-bonus, begins.

The fourth and fifth replays are adjustment replays in the event that multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

A sixth replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "BAR," "cherry," "white shell," or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figure 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in the "tenpai" state. Furthermore, when a symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the active line ML, a "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the bottom row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

A seventh replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the center reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the center reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in a tenpai state. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

The 8th replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

A 9th replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 9th replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle row of the right reel 32R (instead, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a middle row replay miss.

The 10th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. The 12th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 13(c) and 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to a 10th replay win or a 12th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the bottom row of the left reel 32L. If a 10th or 12th replay win has been won, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, a "cherry" symbol will stop on the top row in the case of a 10th replay win, and a "cherry" symbol will stop on the middle or bottom row in the case of a 12th replay win, making it possible to distinguish between a 10th replay win and a 12th replay win. An 11th replay win is achieved when a 10th or 12th replay win is not possible, i.e., when a miss occurs.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win.

When the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White Shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. As shown in Figure 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to a 1st BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "White 7" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win occurs. When a second BB win occurs, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in Figure 13(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, a "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control unit 101, which will be described later. The main control unit 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, the detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control unit 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control unit 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided below and to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined number of virtual medals, which are credited as gaming media, at one time out of the specified number of medals for the game. The specified number is set depending on the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of medals for the game is set to three and the specified number is set to three, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes three virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to two and the specified number is set to two, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes two virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to three or two and the specified number is set to three, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes three virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to three or two and the specified number is set to two, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes two virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if there is not a specific number of credits, virtual medals will be inserted in the amount of credits. For example, if the specific number is set to three and there are two credits, two virtual medals will be inserted.

Furthermore, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each credit insertion switch 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitutes input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, each credit insertion switch 56, 57 merely involves the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, it can also be said that they constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media. Note that this slot machine 10 does not have a credit insertion switch because it inserts one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that players will normally operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is expected that players will normally insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is provided with a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that detects operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided with a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that detects operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. These credit insertion detection sensors 56a, 57a detect operation of the credit insertion switches 56, 57 (see FIG. 15). The first credit insertion switch 56 also has a built-in first credit lamp 56b. The first credit lamp 56b is configured to be switchable between an on state and an off state, and turning the first credit lamp 56b on prompts operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. Instead of or in addition to being configured to be on when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operable, the lamp may be configured to flash.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won as virtual medals, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal discharge port 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, to the left of the credit display unit 60, there is a BET display unit 75 as the first display unit for displaying the number of bets on the game, which is set by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45, and a game status display unit 76 that shows the current progress of the game.

In addition, to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, there is a bet display unit 34 as a second display unit for displaying the number of bets on the game. Furthermore, to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, there is a wait display unit 35 for notifying players that they must wait (wait state) until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin at the start of the game.

The BET display unit 75, game status display unit 76, bet display unit 34, and wait display unit 35 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42-44, there is a lower display unit 69 that displays the gaming machine model name and provides a specified display screen. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as an LCD display unit, or may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 77 that indicates the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control unit 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, but is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. More specifically, it is housed within the board box that houses the main control unit 101 so that the display screen of the role ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is closed, the role ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps in the display windows 26L-26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be viewed unless the front door 12 is unlocked by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21 and opened. The role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in more detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 15 and 16.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the BET display unit 75, the game status display unit 76, the winning combination monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 also includes a backup area, as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of lottery winning combinations, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a standby storage area 106c for storing the state before transitioning to demo mode.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 17) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the bet display unit 34, wait display unit 35, first credit lamp 56b, upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the bet display unit 34, wait display unit 35, first credit lamp 56b, upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control relative to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 17 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to spin them. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, payout number display unit 62, and instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, bet processing is performed.

The bet process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a replay win is achieved in a two-bet game, two virtual medals are automatically inserted.

In the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a process is performed to set the number of bets based on bet number operations such as operating the credit insertion switches 56, 57 or inserting medals through the medal insertion slot 45. This bet process will be explained in detail later.

The following step S205 checks whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, and if an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and abnormality processing is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the abnormality processing is executed, in step S206, a medal return process is executed to pay out the same number of medals as the virtual medals credited based on the operation of the settlement switch 59.

After executing the medal return process, in step S207, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number as a result of the BET process in step S204, and whether the game is in a start-ready state in which a start operation to start the game can be accepted. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3," and the specified numbers in game states other than the bonus state are set to "2" and "3." That is, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S207 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3," and in game states other than the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S207 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2" or "3." In other words, in game states other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a medal has been bet but the bet number is "1," a negative determination is made in step S207. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number and the game is not in a start-ready state, the game returns to the BET process in step S204.

If the game is ready to start, in step S208 it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated to start the game. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the bet processing in step S204.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, since the system is configured so that play can begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S209, processing for the game status display unit is executed. This processing controls the display of the game status display unit 76 based on the game start operation, and details of this processing will be explained later together with an explanation of the game status display unit 76.

In the following step S210, a valid line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the bet number as the valid line. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S211, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S212, the reel control process in step S213, the medal payout process in step S214, and the standby state setting process in step S215 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 19.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are broadly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the specified number of coins to be bet is set to "3" and "2" as described above, and therefore the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set to a lottery table for a 3-bet game and a lottery table for a 2-bet game.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the current gaming state is normal gaming, a lottery table for normal gaming is selected. If the current game is a three-bet game, a lottery table for normal gaming for a three-bet game (FIG. 20) is selected, and if the current game is a two-bet game, a lottery table for normal gaming for a two-bet game (FIG. 21) is selected. Furthermore, this slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1," a lottery table with the lowest expected medal payout value is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6," a lottery table with the highest expected medal payout value is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, operating the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is considered a confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, thereby terminating the winning probability setting process. Upon completion of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display unit 60 also terminates. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will now be briefly explained. Figure 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Figure 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. The winning/loss determination for the winning combination is made by determining whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process is executed to set a winning flag for the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the seventh small winning combination flag and the eighth small winning combination flag are set in step S306. Furthermore, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, the second BB winning flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a will be reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set has ended (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags will be reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in step S306, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the 1st BB winning flag will not be set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small win flag, 9th small win flag, 10th small win flag, and 13th small win flag will be set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB and second BB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when determining whether a winning combination is achieved using the lottery table shown in Figure 20, that is, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 27.3 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 with setting 6, with the higher the setting value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both approximately 1 in 26.2 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1 in 164 regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1 in 262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 1 in 16,400 regardless of the setting value, and the system is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is approximately 1 in 107 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 104 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 93.6 with setting 6, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1 in 215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1 in 13,100 regardless of the setting value, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning a common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 504 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a normal push bell 1, normal push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle normal push bell 1, middle normal push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, and reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is approximately 1 in 18.4 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1 in 5.03 regardless of the setting value, which is set higher than the probability of winning other roles (replay, small roles, IV = 1-24). In 3-bet games, overlapping 1-coin roles (IV = 24) and 2nd BB (IV = 26) are set to not win (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In 3-bet games, the probability of not winning any role, including 1st BB, is 0. And when 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any role in 3-bet games is approximately 1 in 5.03 (for 1st BB) regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in 3-bet games, excluding the increase in 1st BB state, you can expect a decrease of approximately 1.77 medals per game (net increase minus approximately 1.77 medals).

In contrast, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 21 to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, i.e., when playing a two-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, Normal Lip C, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, or Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is the same as the probability when playing a three-bet game. The probability of winning the Common Bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.64 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be easier to win than when playing a three-bet game. The Push Order Bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set to be impossible to win in a two-bet game. The probability of winning the Watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be harder to win than when playing a three-bet game. In a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a double 1-coin role (IV = 24) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 1.81 regardless of the setting value. Also, in a two-bet game, the system is set up so that the first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but the second BB (IV = 26) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 4.95 regardless of the setting value. Even in a two-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the second BB, is zero. And when the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any role in a two-bet game is approximately 1 in 4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a two-bet game, excluding the increase in the second BB, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals per game (net increase minus approximately 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

The following step S310 performs lottery result response processing. This lottery result response processing involves processing to determine whether or not to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and processing to notify the player of the push order combination. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, if push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11) and the first small combination winning flag, ninth small combination winning flag, tenth small combination winning flag, and thirteenth small combination winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small combination, ninth small combination, tenth small combination, and thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, if a watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the 7th small win flag and the 8th small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 7th and 8th small wins can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set to be a winning combination only in a three-bet game, and the second BB is set to be a winning combination only in a two-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a two-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a first BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a first BB win is set). Also, even if the second BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a three-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a second BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a second BB win is set).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB win flag is set and the 1st BB win has been carried over), and then you win a watermelon, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 7th and 8th small wins has been set, the priority will be set so that the 7th and 8th small wins take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if you have won the 2nd BB (the 2nd BB win flag is set and the 2nd BB win has been carried over), and then you win a regular lip A, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd BB win and the 1st replay, 2nd replay, 3rd replay, and 4th replay wins has been set, the priority will be set so that each replay win takes priority over the 2nd BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

After executing the processing of step S313, the first section display processing is executed in step S314, and then the lottery processing ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S213 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 22.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 above. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The spin start process checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning in the previous game. If not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, setting spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. This processing initiates the stepping motor acceleration process in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, causing each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to begin spinning. Therefore, even if a player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The process then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In the following step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 11 to 22, i.e., if the push order bell is won (see Figures 20 and 21), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 17th, 18th, or 21st small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order middle → left → right. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

A brief explanation of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must aim at the symbol and operate stop switches 42-44 to stop the symbol on an active line.

We will explain the example of when the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 17th small win, the 18th small win, or the 21st small win.

The 17th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 18th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red Shell" symbol and the "White Shell" symbol. The 21st minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Replay" symbol and the "Youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the spacing between symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any of the 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols will stop on the active line (middle row) regardless of the timing of the operation. In this slot machine 10, when the operation is performed at a timing when multiple target symbols can be stopped, stop control is performed to stop the symbol with the fewest slip frames on the active line. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-slip) which is the 18th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-slip) which is the 21st minor win symbol to stop in the middle row, but the left reel 32L is controlled to stop the fourth "red shell" symbol, which has the fewest slip frames, in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor win to be achieved, the 17th and 21st minor wins will not be achieved.

If the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th small win symbol can be achieved.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. The "replay" symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the spacing between each "replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of operation of the center stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the center reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" and "young man" symbols is five symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the 18th minor winning symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, may or may not be able to stop on the upper row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is possible to stop them on the upper row, the 18th minor winning symbol will be achieved, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is not possible to stop them on the upper row, a so-called miss will occur.

Here, when the "Red Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the top row of the middle reel 32M, it means that, in addition to the possibility of winning the middle push bell 1 and achieving the 18th small win as described above, it also means that it may win the middle push bell 2 and achieve the 20th small win. In other words, the 20th small win symbol on the middle push bell 2 is the same as the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Furthermore, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small win symbol is the "White Shell" symbol and the "Young Man" symbol, while the 20th small win symbol is the "Red 7" symbol and the "White 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th and 20th small win symbols are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 18th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 20th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 20th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 18th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether middle push bell 1 or middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are stopped in a manner that may result in the 18th or 20th small win, it is not possible to aim for this and win.

Next, we will explain an example where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the third small win.

The "Replay" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is positioned on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between each "Replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "Replay" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is arranged so that the spacing between the "bell" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the third minor winning symbols, the "watermelon" and "red shell" symbols, are arranged so that the spacing between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the third minor winning symbol will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different operation sequence, depending on the operation timing, a small prize will be won, or none of the small prizes will be won and the win will be missed. Incidentally, if the common bell is won, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, bonus state processing is performed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After the bonus state processing is performed, winning result processing is performed in step S415. The winning result processing involves processing such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. The winning result processing will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S417, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S214.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small wins were achieved. In such cases, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay win through 12th replay wins have been achieved, based on the winning combinations set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins has been achieved, the medal payout process is terminated, and if any of the replay wins has been achieved, the process stores information about the winning replay results, and then the medal payout process ends. Note that the BET process (step S204) performs a process to automatically place a bet based on the replay wins.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is set, indicating that either BB has been won. If neither BB win flag is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either BB win flag is set, proceed to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. In other words, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when 3 has been input into the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals will be inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, so if the specified number of medals for the game is set to two or three, it is permissible to play a two-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or inserting two medals into the medal insertion slot 45. Note that if 3 has already been input into the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process is executed to input "46" into the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The BB counter is a counter that determines the upper limit of the payout number in each BB state. In other words, by inputting "46" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, a positive judgment will be made in step S501 from the next game onwards. In the following step S509, a process is executed to set a first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 aware that the first BB state is starting, and upon receiving this first BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. Furthermore, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 is able to understand that the first BB state will begin from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the specified number of bets is set to 3 in step S510, and then the bonus state processing ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins for the game described above. In other words, by transitioning to the first BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the first BB state is executed in a 3-bet game.

The initial values for the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

When it is determined in step S505 that a first BB win has not been achieved, it means that a second BB win has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, where a process of inputting "2" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB win flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. Thereafter, in step S514, a process of setting a second BB start command to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command and is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the second BB state has begun. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform a second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform an effect for the second BB state from the next game onward. The appearance and content of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ to an extent that the player can distinguish them. The appearance and content of the effect for the first BB state and the effect for the second BB state also differ to an extent that the player can distinguish them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

If step S501 returns a positive result, indicating the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, where processing is performed during the first BB state or the second BB state. Figure 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. While this embodiment uses a common lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state, separate lottery tables may be provided for each state, with different types of winning combinations and winning probabilities for each combination. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 25, the first BB state and the second BB state are configured so that normal lip A, common bell, and overlapping 1-coin combinations can be won. The probability of winning normal lip A (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.02, and the probability of winning overlapping 1-coin combinations (the probability of winning when IV = 24) is approximately 1 in 1.78. Additionally, in the first BB state or second BB state, the probability of a losing result (not winning any role) is approximately 1 in 3.13. In this case, you can expect a loss of approximately 0.96 medals per game (net increase of approximately minus 0.96 medals).

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase occurs when the first through sixth minor winning combinations, which result in a payout of 13 medals, are won. These combinations are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winning combinations, assuming that stop switches 42-44 are operated in a fixed order, in the normal game state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 9.19, while in the first BB state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 9.03. In a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to result in a winning combination than the normal game state. Furthermore, in both the normal game state in a two-bet game and the second BB state to which a two-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while the probability of winning in the normal game state is approximately 1 in 9.64, in the second BB state the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 9.03, so even in a two-bet game, the second BB state is set to be more likely to result in a win than the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, the first and second BB states use a lottery table in which medals may decrease with each game, so you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you complete the first and second BB states. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals you have will decrease as you complete the first and second BB states.

In the bonus state processing, step S515 determines whether any small wins have been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table and the control of each reel. If no wins have been achieved, the bonus state processing ends. If a win has been achieved, step S516 executes a process to subtract the payout amount corresponding to the win from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won in the second BB state and the first to sixth small wins are achieved, a payout of 13 coins will be generated. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter, causing the BB counter to become 0 or less.

If it is determined in step S517 that the count is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count is 0 or less, in step S518, the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is cleared. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the MAX bet counter is entered with 2, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state that will currently end is set as the output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to end, the first BB end command is set as the output target, and if the second BB state is to end, the second BB end command is set as the output target. Upon receiving the first BB end command or the second BB end command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65 so that a first BB end effect or a second BB end effect is performed.

Then, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, since 2 is input into the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 inserts two virtual medals and a 2-bet game is played. In other words, when neither the first BB hit flag nor the second BB hit flag is set, the system is set to make it easier to play a 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input into the MAX bet counter, so operating the first credit insertion switch 56 does not allow a 3-bet, and three medals must be inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to play a 3-bet game.

Here, we will briefly explain the gameplay of this slot machine 10 using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game, with reference to Figure 26.

In the initial state after RAM 106 has been initialized (cleared), the first BB win flag and second BB win flag are not set, and the game is in a normal game state (non-internal state) where no BB has been won. In this case, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3, and both 2-bet games and 3-bet games are possible. However, as described above, 2 is input into the MAX bet counter, and when play is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, a 2-bet game will be played.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, the first BB may be won but the second BB may not be won, and in a 2-bet game, the second BB may be won but the first BB may not be won. As described above, in a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the second BB can basically be won in a 2-bet game.

If the first or second BB is won but no prize is awarded in that winning game, the first or second BB win will be carried over, resulting in a carryover state (internal state). Even in this internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to two or three, allowing for two-bet and three-bet games. However, if the max bet counter is set to three as described above and play is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, it will be a three-bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the first BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the first BB win cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the second BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the second BB win cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the second BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game. In other words, if the first BB is won in a 3-bet game, the first BB win can be achieved by continuing with the 3-bet game, but if the first BB is won and then the game is switched to a 2-bet game, the first BB win cannot be achieved. Furthermore, if you win the second BB in a two-bet game, you can achieve the second BB win by continuing to play the two-bet game, but if you switch to a three-bet game after winning the second BB, you cannot achieve the second BB win. The first BB and second BB cannot be won twice, and you cannot win the first BB again if you have a first BB win carried over, nor can you win the second BB twice. You cannot win the second BB again if you have a second BB win carried over, nor can you win the first BB twice. In other words, if you win the first BB and play a two-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the first BB win is carried over, and if you win the second BB and play a three-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the second BB win is carried over.

As described above, because the first BB win is only possible in a three-bet game and the second BB win is only possible in a two-bet game, even if a three-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a second BB win is carried over, the second BB win will not be achieved, and even if a two-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a first BB win is carried over, the first BB win will not be achieved. This dramatically simplifies the role configuration and control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where a first BB win or a second BB win is carried over. For example, if a 3-bet game is configured so that a 2nd BB win can be achieved, or a 2-bet game is configured so that a 1st BB win can be achieved, and you want to continue the internal state in which the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win has been carried over, you will need to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing outcome, and for example, in the case of a combination that may result in a miss, you will need to have a different combination win when that miss occurs.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role for increasing medals is the common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role for increasing medals in a two-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role for increasing medals in a three-bet game is the push order bell. For the common bell, any of the first to sixth small roles will be won regardless of the operation sequence or timing of the stop switches 42-44, whereas for the push order bell, the winning small role differs depending on the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, the fluctuation in medal gain or loss due to the operation sequence and timing (mainly the operation sequence) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and the internal state in a three-bet game than in the first BB state and the second BB state. For example, by announcing the operation sequence (Figure 25) resulting in the first to sixth small wins when the push order bell is won, it is possible to switch between an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) that does not, and create a state in which medals increase or decrease depending on whether or not the notification (assist) is given.

In a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a two-bet game is played in the non-internal state, and the second BB is won in that two-bet game. When the second BB is won, the game switches to the internal state, and in a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game switches to a three-bet game, and the game continues in a state in which the second BB winning mentioned above cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the three-bet game in which the second BB winning has been carried over, the first BB is not won, and the second BB is not won, and generally, the game continues in an internal state in which the second BB winning has been carried over.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB win flag is stored in the normal area of the various flag storage area 106d, while the second BB win flag is stored in the save area of the various flag storage area 106d. The normal area is an area where various general flags, such as win flags for other roles, are stored. The flags stored in the normal area are retained using backup power or other means even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (powered off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the amusement hall closes, the slot machine 10 will start up with the various flags stored in the normal area when the power is turned on the next day. Even if the power is turned on/off with the first BB win flag set, the slot machine 10 will start up with the first BB win flag set. However, if the win probability setting process is started (if the setting is changed) when the slot machine 10 is started up, the normal area is initialized (cleared). Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the 1st BB winning flag is cleared along with the other flags stored in these normal areas.

In contrast, the storage area is an area where only the second BB winning flag is stored. Like the normal area described above, the flags stored in the storage area are not cleared when the power is turned on/off. Furthermore, even when the winning probability setting process is initiated upon startup of the slot machine 10, the storage area is not initialized (is excluded from the initialization process). Therefore, even when the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared and is retained (saved). In other words, if the winning probability setting process is performed in a first BB winning internal state in which a first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and the machine is started in a non-internal state. On the other hand, if the winning probability setting process is performed in a second BB winning internal state in which a second BB winning flag is stored, the second BB winning flag is not cleared and the machine is started in the second BB winning internal state. By doing this, it is possible to continue playing in an internal state in which the second BB win is carried over, not only when the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, but also when settings are changed.

In this case, in order to play in an internal state in which a second BB win is carried over, all that is required is to play the two-bet game until a second BB win occurs in the slot machine 10 when it is shipped from the factory. Thereafter, that second BB win will be stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clear process is performed. This makes it possible to optimally play in a state in which a second BB win is carried over.

The following will assume that the game is played with the second BB win carried over, and will explain the gameplay that utilizes notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal play in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 27. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game has been performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for transition to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process is performed to determine the current game state. More specifically, it is determined whether the current state is either the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether the current state is a non-internal state (normal game state) before the first BB or second BB win, or an internal state (carryover state) after the first BB or second BB win. In the first BB state or the second BB state, the specified number (specified bet number) is set to 3, while in the non-internal state before the first BB or second BB win or the internal state after the first BB or second BB win, the specified number (specified bet number) is set to 2 or 3. Then, in step S602, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is a specified number (specific specified number) specified in the state determined in step S601. In this embodiment, the specific specified number for the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3. In this case, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. Therefore, if step S601 determines that the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, a positive determination is always made in step S602. In contrast, in this embodiment, for states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, the specific specified number is set to 3 out of the specified numbers of 2 and 3. If the number of bets is 3 in a state other than the first BB state or the second BB state, a positive determination is made in step S602. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S603 onwards is performed. In contrast, if the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state or the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result response processing ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to AT mode from step S603 onwards will not be held, putting the player at a disadvantage. By doing this, the internal state can be set to a 3-bet game, making it easier to play normal gameplay with the second BB carried over. Note that the specific prescribed number for the first BB state and the second BB state can be set to 2, and in the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative judgment can always be made in step S602, preventing processing for the display mode from being performed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602, in step S603, it is determined whether or not a favorable zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding whether or not push order notifications etc. will occur, favorable zones in which push order notifications etc. may occur and normal zones in which they will not occur are set. The favorable zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the current game is in a favorable zone, and is set upon transition to a favorable zone and cleared upon transition to a normal zone.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone. In this case, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery results for the current game are obtained in step S701. Then, in step S702, a advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, the advantageous zone transition lottery table has a transition rate to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) set according to the lottery results for each game. As also shown in FIG. 33, the triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, processing is performed in step S703 to obtain a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e. This dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval, and in step S703, the most recent updated value of that counter is obtained. Then, in step S704, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that any trigger role has a 100% chance of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result determined in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is possible to omit processing in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, then in step S706, a process is executed to set a favorable zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The favorable zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current game is a game in which the transition lottery to the favorable zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 has been executed, the favorable zone transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous zone flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether an AT mode win flag or an AT mode flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode win flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when transitioning to AT mode. In other words, in step S605, it is determined whether transition to AT mode has already been confirmed or has already been made. If neither flag is set in step S605 and transition to AT mode has not yet been confirmed, AT lottery processing is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if either flag is set in step S605, AT addition processing is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S801, a subtraction process is performed on the ceiling counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The ceiling counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to determine the maximum number of games (ceiling game number) that can be played in the advantageous zone without transitioning to AT mode. A predetermined lottery value is input into the ceiling counter when transitioning to the advantageous zone. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the ceiling counter is set to 999. In other words, by playing a maximum of 999 games after transitioning to the advantageous zone, a transition to AT mode will occur even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In step S801, a process is performed to subtract 1 from the ceiling counter. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether the ceiling counter has reached 0. If it is not 0, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S805.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether any of the first CZ mode flag, second CZ mode flag, and third CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, normal mode and CZ mode are provided as advantageous zones before winning the AT mode transition lottery, and CZ mode is set as a mode that is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than normal mode. As CZ modes, first CZ mode, second CZ mode, and third CZ mode, which have different transition triggers, are set, and the above-mentioned first CZ mode flag to third CZ mode flag are flags that the CPU 102 uses to distinguish between these first CZ mode to third CZ mode. Then, if it is determined in step S803 that any of the CZ mode flags is not set, normal AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. If any of the CZ mode flags is set in step S803, CZ AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S805.

In the normal AT mode lottery processing of step S804, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is determined. Then, in step S902, a normal AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 33, the normal AT mode transition lottery table sets the AT mode transition rate (probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery) according to the lottery result of each game. As also shown in FIG. 33, the trigger roles for the normal AT mode transition lottery are set as follows: normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as trigger roles for the normal AT mode transition lottery.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S902, processing is performed to obtain random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery in step S903. Then, in step S904, an AT mode transition lottery is performed, and then the AT mode lottery processing ends. In other words, in the normal AT mode lottery processing, an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery results of each game.

In contrast, the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode uses the lottery results of multiple games during CZ mode to determine the AT mode transition lottery.

That is, in the CZ AT mode lottery process in step S805, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 31, first, the lottery results for the current game are determined in step S1001. Then, in step S1002, a process is executed to obtain a point table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105.

As shown in Figure 33, the points table is set up so that the point value acquired in the current game can differ depending on the lottery results of each game. For example, if the lottery result of the current game is Cherry A, 20 points are acquired, and if the lottery result of the current game is Cherry B, which is less likely to win than Cherry A, 50 points are acquired. In other words, the lower the probability of winning in the lottery process of each game, the more points are acquired.

Then, in step S1003, a process is executed to add the point value obtained in the current game to the cumulative counter RC provided in the various counter area 106e. Note that in this embodiment, the lottery result command for each game is set to include information about the cumulative counter RC, so that the display control device 81 can also grasp the value of the cumulative counter RC along with the lottery results for each game.

In the following step S1004, a process is executed to grasp the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The CZ counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time one game is played in CZ mode. Then, in step S1005, a process is executed to obtain the CZ AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a, and in step S1006, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, after which the CZ AT mode lottery process is terminated.

As shown in Figure 34, the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the product of a predetermined number, which is set according to the CZ counter value and the cumulative counter RC value, and the cumulative counter RC is set as the winning probability (%) of the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the CZ counter is 16 or greater, and the cumulative counter RC is 0-59, the predetermined number is set as 0.1, and if the cumulative counter RC is 80-100, the predetermined number is set as 0.6. In this case, if the CZ counter is 16 or greater and the cumulative counter RC is 30, the product of the predetermined number (0.1) and the cumulative counter RC (30) results in a winning probability of 3%. Furthermore, if the CZ counter is 16 or greater and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (90) results in a winning probability of 54%. Also, if the CZ counter is between 3 and 1, and the cumulative counter RC is between 0 and 9, the predetermined number is set to 0.5, and if the cumulative counter RC is between 50 and 100, the predetermined number is set to 1.0. In this case, if the CZ counter is between 3 and 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 5, the product of the predetermined number (0.6) and the cumulative counter RC (5) gives a winning probability of 3% in the AT mode transition lottery. Also, if the CZ counter is between 3 and 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the product of the predetermined number (1.0) and the cumulative counter RC (90) gives a winning probability of 90% in the AT mode transition lottery.

In other words, in the CZ mode of this embodiment, the greater the point value acquired in each game in CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the fewer games remaining in CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. Furthermore, even if the point value acquired in each game in CZ mode is large, it is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery if there are many games remaining in CZ mode. In this way, winning the AT mode transition lottery too early after transitioning to CZ mode is suppressed, and efforts are made to increase attention to the lottery results for each game in CZ mode while allowing players to enjoy the game (presentation) in CZ mode to the very end.

Returning to the explanation of the AT lottery processing, after the AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S804 or step S805, in step S806 it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery in the AT mode lottery processing in step S804 or step S805 has been won. If the lottery has been won, the AT mode transition lottery processing in steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if the lottery has not been won, the AT mode non-winning processing in steps S811 to S819 is executed.

That is, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, first, in step S807, the process for setting the premonition mode is executed. Note that even if the ceiling counter reaches 0 in step S802, the process proceeds to step S807, and the process for setting the premonition mode is executed. The premonition mode is a mode in which, when a situation in which a transition to AT mode may occur is created, such as by winning the AT mode transition lottery, a premonition effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64 to indicate that a transition to the AT mode may occur. In step S807, the process for setting the number of games, etc. for the premonition mode is executed depending on the trigger that creates the situation in which a transition to the AT mode may occur.

That is, in the premonition mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1101, the process of determining the cumulative counter RC is executed, and then in step S1102, the process of determining the CZ counter is executed. Then, in step S1103, the process of retrieving the immediate notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step S1104, the immediate notification lottery process is executed. In the immediate notification lottery process, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to notify that a situation has arisen in which a transition to AT mode may occur without using the premonition effects described above.

As shown in Figure 35, the instant notification lottery table is set up so that the probability of winning the instant notification lottery varies depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the smaller the CZ counter value, i.e., the fewer games remaining in CZ mode, the easier it is to win the instant notification lottery; and the larger the cumulative counter RC value, i.e., the greater the point value earned during CZ mode, the easier it is to win the instant notification lottery. Note that in this embodiment, if the CZ counter is 0 and a transition to AT mode during normal mode is won, there is a 100% chance of winning the instant notification lottery.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the immediate notification lottery of step S1104 was won. If the immediate notification lottery was not won, processing for the premonition mode is performed in steps S1106 to S1113. If the immediate notification lottery was won, processing for the AT mode notification is performed in steps S1114 to S1119.

If the immediate notification lottery is not won, in step S1106, it is determined whether the situation in which the current AT mode transition lottery was won was the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode among the CZ modes. If it was the second CZ mode rather than the first or third CZ mode, a lottery process for the number of games to be played for the premonition effect is executed in step S1107. Then, in step S1108, a process is executed in which the result of the lottery executed in step S1107 and the current CZ counter (the number of games remaining in CZ mode) are added together and the result is input into the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games from when a situation arises in which a transition to AT mode may occur until an announcement is made that this situation has occurred (an AT win notification effect).

In the lottery process for determining the number of premonition effect games in step S1107, the premonition effect game count table is retrieved from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of premonition effect games for this round is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the premonition effect game count table is set so that any of 13 to 15 games is selected. The selection rate varies depending on the number of games, such that 15 games are more likely to be selected, while 13 or 14 games are less likely to be selected. For example, if 14 games are selected in the premonition effect game count lottery process and there are 3 games remaining in CZ mode, 17 will be input into the premonition counter, and a notification to that effect will be made 17 games after a situation has arisen in which a transition to AT mode may occur (after the AT mode win flag is set).

After executing the premonition counter input process in step S1108, processing is performed to set a premonition flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1109. Then, processing is performed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1110, and then this premonition mode setting processing is terminated. The premonition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the premonition mode has been set, and the premonition command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to know that the premonition mode has been set. Furthermore, the premonition command includes the value of the premonition counter, and the display control device 81 can determine from the value of the premonition counter which game should be notified that a situation has arisen in which a transition to AT mode may occur. The processing performed by the display control device 81 when a premonition command is received will be described in detail later.

If the first CZ mode or third CZ mode is selected in step S1106, a determination is made in step S1111 as to whether the mode is the first CZ mode. If the mode is the first CZ mode, a process is executed in step S1112 in which a predetermined number (5) is added to the CZ counter and the resulting value is input into the premonition counter. If the third CZ mode is selected and not the first CZ mode in step S1111, a process is executed in step S1113 in which the value of the CZ counter is input into the premonition counter. Then, the premonition flag is set in step S1109, and the premonition command is set in step S1110, after which the premonition mode setting process is terminated. In this case, in the first CZ mode, a predetermined number of games are played after the number of games remaining in the first CZ mode reaches 0, and in the third CZ mode, the number of games remaining in the third CZ mode reaches 0, thereby informing the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

In other words, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the number of games until a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won varies depending on the type of CZ mode, and in the first CZ mode, a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is made after a fewer number of games than in the second CZ mode or third CZ mode. The reason for this configuration will be explained in detail when explaining the presentation content in CZ mode.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the instant notification lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1114. In step S1114, the CZ counter is cleared to 0. Then, in step S1105, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type will be the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set as AT modes, which have different add-on performance during AT mode (probability of winning the add-on lottery), and the second AT mode has better add-on performance than the first AT mode (it is set to make it easier to win the add-on lottery). In the AT type determination process in step S1115, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery, for example, based on the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals added during the advantageous zone, the number of games played during the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly.

In step S1116, it is determined whether the first AT mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S1115. If the first AT mode has been selected, in step S1117 a process is executed to set a first AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S1118 a process is executed to set a first AT win instant notification command as a target for output to the display control device 81, after which the premonition mode setting process is terminated. The first AT notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that a first AT start result will appear on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when the first AT mode starts, and the first AT win instant notification command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to know that a situation has arisen in which a transition to the first AT mode may occur. The processing on the display control device 81 side upon receiving the first AT win instant notification command will be described in detail below.

If step S1116 determines that the AT is the second AT and not the first AT, step S1119 executes a process of setting a second AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and step S1120 executes a process of setting a second AT win instant notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the premonition mode setting process ends. The second AT notification flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the results for starting the second AT will appear on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when the second AT mode starts, and the second AT win instant notification command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to know that a situation has arisen in which a transition to the second AT mode may occur. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the second AT win instant notification command will also be explained in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the AT lottery processing, after the premonition mode setting processing is executed in step S807, a determination is made in step S808 as to whether any CZ mode flags are set. If any CZ mode flags are set, processing is executed in step S809 to clear the set CZ mode flags. If a negative determination is made in step S808, or after the processing of step S809 is executed, processing is executed in step S810 to set the AT mode winning flag, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. By performing this processing, a positive determination will be made in step S605 in the lottery result response processing from the next game onwards.

If it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, it is determined in step S811 whether any of the CZ mode flags are set. If none of the CZ mode flags are set and the game is in normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery is held in steps S812 to S819. On the other hand, if any of the CZ mode flags are set, the AT lottery processing ends without performing steps S812 to S819.

In other words, in step S812, it is determined whether the advantageous zone game count AG set in the various counter areas 106e is equal to or greater than a predetermined first predetermined value (31) and equal to or less than a predetermined second predetermined value (700). The advantageous zone game count AG is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to keep track of the number of games in the advantageous zone, and is incremented by one for each game after transition to the advantageous zone and reset when the advantageous zone ends. If the advantageous zone game count AG is less than the first predetermined number or greater than the second predetermined number, the AT lottery processing is terminated without conducting a lottery to transition to CZ mode, etc.

In this embodiment, the CZ mode may be set when transitioning to a favorable zone, and the first predetermined number is set to a number greater than the number of games required until the results of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode set when transitioning to the favorable zone are announced. Also, as described above, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter set when transitioning to a favorable zone becomes 0, allowing transition to AT mode without going through the AT mode transition lottery, and the second predetermined value is a value close to the upper limit (999) of the ceiling counter set when transitioning to a favorable zone, and more specifically, is set to 700, which is 70% of the upper limit.

In other words, when the advantageous zone is consumed up to a value close to the upper limit of the ceiling counter, the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode and the like will no longer be held. Note that, although the ceiling counter setting process will be explained in detail later, there are cases where a value smaller than the second predetermined value is set to the ceiling counter when transitioning to the advantageous zone. In this case, the ceiling will be reached and transition to AT mode will be permitted before reaching the upper limit number of games (700) at which the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode and the like will be held. In other words, even if a value smaller than the second predetermined value is entered in the ceiling counter, there are cases where the lottery for transitioning to CZ mode will be won just before reaching the ceiling.

If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is within the range for holding a CZ mode transition lottery or the like in step S812, a process is executed to obtain a CZ mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a in step S813, and a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814. As shown in FIG. 33, the CZ mode transition lottery table has a transition rate to CZ mode (probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) set according to the lottery results of each game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is chance eye A, there is a 7% probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery. If the lottery result of this game is chance eye B, which is less likely to win than chance eye A, there is a 15% probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, which is higher than chance eye A. In other words, the lower the occurrence rate of the game's lottery result, the more likely it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery.

After the CZ mode transition lottery is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If the CZ mode transition lottery has not been won, the AT lottery processing is terminated. If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, in step S816, a second CZ mode game number lottery processing is executed, and in step S817, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is entered into the CZ counter, and in step S818, a process is executed to set the second CZ mode flag. In other words, if the CZ mode transition lottery is won during normal mode in an advantageous zone, the second CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery processing in step S816. In the second CZ mode game number lottery processing, a second CZ mode game number table is obtained from the various table memory area 105a, and the number of games for this second CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the second CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 to 15 games is selected. For example, 10 or 11 games are likely to be selected, while 8 or 15 games are less likely to be selected; the selection rate varies depending on the number of games. For example, if 10 games are selected in the second CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 will be entered into the CZ counter in step S817.

After setting the second CZ mode flag in step S818, the process executes step S819 to set the second CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process ends. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the second CZ mode start command will be explained in detail later.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 37. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when the AT mode hit flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding to the number of continuing games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1201, the lottery results for the current game are determined. Then, in steps S1202 to S1208, a process is executed to obtain an addition lottery table corresponding to the current situation. That is, in step S1202, it is determined whether the AT mode win flag has been set and a situation has arisen in which a transition to AT mode is possible, but a transition to AT mode has not yet occurred. If the situation is before a transition to AT mode, a positive determination is made in step S1202, and it is determined in step S1203 whether the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. A situation in which the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set means that a notification (AT win notification effect) has already been executed to indicate that a transition to AT mode is possible, and a transition to AT mode has not yet occurred. In other words, if neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set in step S1203, this means that a transition to AT mode may occur, but a notification to that effect has not yet been made (premonition mode).

Therefore, if it is determined in step S1203 that neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set, a process is executed in step S1204 to obtain a post-win, pre-win notification additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a, and if it is determined in step S1203 that either flag is set, a process is executed in step S12056 to obtain a post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table.

As shown in Figure 38, when comparing the post-win, pre-win notification additional lottery table with the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table, the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table is set up so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-win notification additional lottery table. More specifically, for example, in an additional lottery triggered by chance eye B, the additional lottery using the post-win, pre-win notification additional lottery table has a 5% chance of winning, while the additional lottery using the post-win notification, pre-transition additional lottery table has a 7% chance of winning. This means that in the situation before transitioning to AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after a win is notified than before the AT mode win is notified.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1202, the AT mode flag is set, meaning that a transition to AT mode has already occurred. In this case, in step S1206, the first AT flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d, and it is determined whether the current AT mode is the first AT mode. If it is the first AT mode, in step S1207, a process is executed to obtain the first AT add-on lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If it is the second AT mode, in step S1208, a process is executed to obtain the second AT add-on lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in Figure 38, when comparing the first AT add-on lottery table and the second AT add-on lottery table, the add-on lottery using the second AT add-on lottery table is set up so that it is easier to win the add-on lottery than the add-on lottery using the first AT add-on lottery table. More specifically, for example, in an add-on lottery triggered by Cherry B, the add-on lottery using the first AT add-on lottery table has a 10% chance of winning, while the add-on lottery using the second AT add-on lottery table has a 20% chance of winning, meaning that after switching to AT mode, it is easier to win the add-on lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the add-on lottery table is obtained in any of the processes of step S1204, step S1205, step S1207, and step S1208, an add-on lottery is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery has not been won, the AT add-on processing is terminated. If the add-on lottery has been won, an add-on game number lottery processing is executed in step S1211. In the add-on game number lottery processing, an add-on game number table is obtained from the various table memory area 105a, and the number of add-on games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in Figure 38, the number of added games table is set so that the number of added games varies depending on the lottery result of the game that triggers the addition. For example, when the addition is triggered by a normal lip A, an average of 150 games are added, while when the addition is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, the number of added games is set to be greater when the addition is triggered by an opportunity that is less likely to result in a win in the add-on lottery.

After executing the lottery process for the number of added games in step S1211, in step S1212, the CPU 102 adds the current number of added games to the AT counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in AT mode. After executing the process in step S1212, in step S1213, the CPU 102 executes a process to set the added command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then ends the AT added-on process. Upon receiving the added-on command, the display control device 81 executes a process to display an added-on notification effect corresponding to the added-on on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

Return to the explanation of the lottery result response process (Figure 27).

After executing the processing of step S606 or step S607, step S608 determines whether the lottery result for this game was a push order combination win. A push order combination is a result that includes the push order bell, as well as normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C. Normal lip A, normal lip B, and normal lip C are all wins that can be obtained by multiple replays, and the replay that results in a winning combination can vary depending on the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 39, in normal replay A, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the first replay win is achieved. In contrast, in normal replay B and normal replay C, if the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the second or third replay win is achieved. If the left stop switch 42 or the center stop switch 43 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the first replay win is achieved. However, in normal replay A, normal replay B, and normal replay C, regardless of which of the overlapping replay wins is achieved, the bonus awarded is a replay; the only difference is the type of replay achieved. In other words, while normal RIP A, normal RIP B, and normal RIP C result in a replay win regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, the resulting game results differ depending on the order in which they are operated. Normal RIP B and normal RIP C, in particular, trigger the start of the AT mode. After the AT mode win flag is set, a notification is issued indicating that a transition to AT mode is possible, and the first AT mode is initiated in a game in which a second replay win is possible. After the AT mode win flag is set, a notification is issued indicating that a transition to AT mode is possible, and the second AT mode is initiated in a game in which a third replay win is possible. In other words, even if the AT mode win flag is set, the first AT mode or the second AT mode will not be initiated until the notification (AT win notification effect) is executed. Even after the notification is executed, the first AT mode or the second AT mode will not be initiated until a game in which a second or third replay win is possible.

If it is determined in step S608 that a push order role has been won, it is determined in step S609 whether any of the CZ mode flags, AT mode win flags, or AT mode flags are set. If any of these flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result response process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result response process is terminated.

<Outline of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the push order notification process executed in step S610, an overview of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained. Note that the push order notification and push order notification effect can also be referred to as push order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification, for example. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the push order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 40. Figure 40(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 40(b) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display mode and display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in Figure 40(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 40(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 lights up in the game in which the start conditions are met, including notification conditions that cause a transition to the advantageous zone and a situation in which a push order notification may occur. It also turns off when the AT mode ends and the game transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and other indicators is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, or during non-specific zones that are advantageous zones but are not specific zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, because it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Next, the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 41. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in Figure 41(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the figure, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button display is also displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for the current game and that the middle stop switch 43 is the stop switch that should be operated first. Furthermore, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 41 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 41 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through an acceleration period, and up to a constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Push order notification processing>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S610 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 42.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether any of the first CZ mode flag, second CZ mode flag, or third CZ mode flag is set. If none of the first CZ mode flag, third CZ mode flag, or third CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1302 whether the AT mode win flag is set. If the first CZ mode flag, third CZ mode flag, or third CZ mode flag is not set and the AT mode win flag is set, this means that the transition to AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode win. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode win flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, this means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the game is still in premonition mode. In this case, no push order notification is generated for this game, and the push order notification process is terminated. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, it proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is normal reply B or normal reply C. If it is not normal reply B or normal reply C, but normal reply A or the push order bell, the actual push order notification process is terminated. If it is either normal reply B or normal reply C, it is determined in step S1305 whether it is normal reply B. If it is normal reply B, it is determined in step S1306 whether the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the actual push order notification process is terminated. If normal reply B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, proceed to step S1307 and execute processing to start the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1307, the flag for the first AT notification is cleared. Then, in step S1308, a flag for starting the first AT is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The flag for starting the first AT is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the first AT mode will start from the current game. Then, in step S1309, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a push order notification corresponding to the second replay win is made. Then, in step S1310, a process is executed to set a push order command including information on the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives this push order command, it displays a push order notification corresponding to the second replay win, such as the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, a display or voice guidance such as "Aim from the right!!", and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player of the symbol corresponding to the second replay win.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the selected button is normal lip C and not normal lip B, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set and not the second AT notification flag, the main push order notification process ends. If normal lip C is selected and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1312, and processing is performed to start the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1312, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1313, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that the second AT mode will start from the current game. Then, in step S1314, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a push order notification corresponding to the third replay win is made. Then, in step S1315, a process is executed to set a push order command including information on the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. When the display control device 81 receives this push order command, it displays a push order notification corresponding to the third replay win, such as the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, a display or voice guidance such as "Aim from the right!!", and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to notify the player of the symbol corresponding to the third replay win.

If it is determined in step S1301 that any CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set and the AT mode is already in effect in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a push order bell. If it is not a push order bell, the push order notification process is terminated. If it is a push order bell, it is determined in step S1317 whether any CZ mode flag is set. If any CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1318 whether an already-announced flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The already-announced flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a push order notification has already been made when the push order bell is won in CZ mode, and is a flag that is cleared when CZ mode ends (including when transitioning to AT mode). If the already-announced flag is set, the push order notification process is terminated. If the notification flag is not set, step S1319 executes processing to set the notification flag.

If the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag in step S1317, or after executing the processing of step S1319, in step S1320, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made according to the type of push order bell. Then, in step S1321, a push order command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth small wins is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. Upon receiving this push order command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that push order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are made.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result response process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 43. In the winning result response process, processing is performed to start or end the CZ mode, AT mode, etc., depending on the game result.

First, in step S1401, a process is performed to determine the current game state, and in step S1402, a determination is made as to whether the number of bets for the current game is the specific specified number specified for the state determined in step S1401. This process corresponds to steps S601 and S602 above. If the number of bets is not the specific specified number in step S1402, the winning result response process ends without performing the processes from step S1403 onwards. If the number of bets is the specific specified number corresponding to the state, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a first game count management process is executed, and in step S1404, a second game count management process is executed. The first game count management process is a process that mainly manages the number of games played before transitioning to AT mode, such as CZ mode or premonition mode, and the second game count management process is a process that manages the number of games played in AT mode.

In the first game count management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If either of the BB states is true, the first game count management process is terminated. In other words, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a two-bet game, management of the number of games played in premonition mode or CZ mode is not performed. If neither of the BB states is true, the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the number of games set at the time of transition to CZ mode has not been played. As already explained, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared in the AT lottery process. Therefore, even if the CZ mode flag is not set, it may be determined in step S1502 that the CZ counter is greater than 0.

As mentioned above, if you win the AT mode transition during CZ mode, and you do not win the instant notification lottery, a value equal to or greater than the CZ counter will be entered into the premonition counter. In other words, if the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the CZ mode flag is not set, this means you are in premonition mode after winning the AT mode transition.

If the CZ counter is greater than 0, step S1503 executes a process to decrement the CZ counter by 1. Then, step S1504 determines whether the CZ counter has reached 0. If it has, step S1505 determines whether any CZ mode flags are set. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared. Therefore, if any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, this means that CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. If any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, step S1506 executes a process to set a CZ end game flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ end game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine which game has ended CZ mode, and is cleared after the game ends (see step S203).

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S1505, or after the processing of step S1506 has been executed, processing is executed in step S1507 to set the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the CZ end command will be explained in detail later.

If the CZ counter is 0 in step S1502, if the CZ counter is not 0 in step S1504, or after the processing of step S1507 is executed, step S1508 determines whether the premonition counter is greater than 0 and whether the number of games corresponding to the premonition counter set in the premonition mode setting processing has not yet been played. If the premonition counter is greater than 0, step S1509 executes processing to subtract 1 from the premonition counter. Then, step S1510 determines whether the premonition counter has reached 0.

If the premonition counter reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S1511, where the premonition flag is cleared. Then, in step S1512, an AT type determination process is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. This process corresponds to the process of step S1115 above. That is, in the AT type determination process of step S1512, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery, for example, based on the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased during the advantageous zone, the number of games played during the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly. Note that the selection rates for the first AT mode and the second AT mode may differ between the AT type determination process of step S1115 and the AT type determination process of step S1512. For example, the selection rate for the second AT mode may be higher in the process of step S1512 than in the process of step S1115.

In step S1513, it is determined whether the first AT mode has been determined as a result of the processing in step S1512. If the first AT mode has been determined, in step S1514, a process is executed to set the first AT notification flag, and in step S1515, a process is executed to set the first AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the number of games management process is terminated. By setting the first AT notification flag, processing is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process to generate a push order notification for the second replay win. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the first AT winning notification command will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the AT mode to be transitioned to this time is the second AT mode and not the first AT mode, then in step S1516, a process is executed to set the second AT notification flag, and in step S1517, a process is executed to set the second AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the number of games management process is terminated. By setting the second AT notification flag, the above-mentioned push order notification process is executed to generate a push order notification for the third replay win. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the second AT winning notification command will be explained in detail later.

In the second game count management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and if it is either of the BB states, the second game count management process is terminated. In other words, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a two-bet game, management of the number of games in AT mode is not performed. If it is not either of the BB states, the process proceeds to step S1602, where it is determined whether the AT counter is greater than 0 and whether the number of remaining games in AT mode is greater than 0.

If the AT counter is greater than 0, processing is executed in step S1603 to decrement the AT counter by 1. Then, in step S1604, it is determined whether the AT counter has reached 0, and if so, processing is executed in step S1605 to clear the AT mode flag. Then, in step S1606, processing is executed to set the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the AT end command will be explained in detail later. If the AT counter is 0 in step S1602 or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1604, the second game number management processing is terminated.

After executing the processing of step S1606, a third CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1607, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is entered into the CZ counter in step S1608, and the third CZ mode flag is set in step S1609. That is, in this embodiment, when the AT mode ends, the system transitions to the CZ mode. The CZ mode to which the system transitions upon the end of the AT mode is set to the third CZ mode, and the number of games is determined by the lottery process of step S1607. In the third CZ mode game number lottery process, a third CZ mode game number table is retrieved from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of games for the current third CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the third CZ mode game number table is set so that any of 25 to 30 games is selected. For example, the selection rate varies depending on the number of games; for example, 30 games is more likely to be selected, while 25 games is less likely to be selected. For example, if 30 games are selected in the third CZ mode game number lottery process, 30 will be entered into the CZ counter in step S1608.

After setting the third CZ mode flag in step S1609, processing is executed in step S1610 to set the third CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the third CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result response process, after executing the game count management process in steps S1403 and S1404, step S1405 determines whether the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the first AT start flag is set in a game in which a second replay win is possible when a transition to the first AT mode occurs. More specifically, it is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which a normal replay B is won when the first AT notification flag is set. In other words, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the first AT start flag is set, step S1406 clears the first AT start flag, and step S1407 executes processing to set the first AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, setting the first AT flag causes an additional lottery to be held using the first AT additional lottery table.

If it is determined in step S1405 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is set in a game in which a third replay win is possible when a transition to the second AT mode occurs. More specifically, it is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which a normal replay C is won when the second AT notification flag is set. In other words, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1409, and the second AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1410. If it is determined in step S1408 that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result response process is terminated. As already explained, when the second AT flag is set, an additional lottery is conducted using the second AT additional lottery table.

After executing the processing of step S1407 or step S1410, the processing of inputting 50 into the above-mentioned AT counter is executed in step S1411. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, 50 games is set as the initial number of games in both the first AT mode and the second AT mode. Note that the initial number of games may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or may be determined by lottery. In this case, the initial number of games may be more likely to be higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1412, the AT mode winning flag is cleared, and in step S1413, the AT mode flag is set. Then, in step S1414, the AT start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this winning result response processing is terminated. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the AT start command will be explained in detail later.

<Management of advantageous zones>
Next, we will explain the first section display process and the second section display process, which are used to control the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transition to a favorable section, and end a favorable section.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 46. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S314 of the lottery process (Fig. 19), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, it indicates that the zone is a specific zone within the advantageous zone where at least the notification conditions for a push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous zone flag is not set, in step S1703, a process is executed to increment the normal counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1. The normal counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games that have started as a normal zone rather than an advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery processing, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that game as a winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set, processing is executed in step S1705 to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, processing is executed in step S1706 to set the advantageous zone flag.

In step S1707, processing is performed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone, more specifically, to start measuring the advantageous zone game count AG in the various counter areas 106e. As described above, the advantageous zone game count AG corresponds to a means for determining the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Then, in step S1708, processing for advantageous zone transition games is executed.

In the processing for the advantageous zone transition game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, a first CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1801, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is entered into the CZ counter in step S1802, and the first CZ mode flag is set in step S1803. That is, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is set upon transition to the advantageous zone, and when the transition to the advantageous zone is triggered, the first CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery process in step S1801. In the first CZ mode game number lottery process, a first CZ mode game number table is retrieved from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of games for the current first CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the first CZ mode game number table is set so that one of 8 to 10 games is selected. The selection rate varies depending on the number of games, such that 8 and 9 games are more likely to be selected and 10 games is less likely to be selected. For example, if 10 games are selected in the first CZ mode game number lottery process, 10 will be entered into the CZ counter in step S1802.

After setting the first CZ mode flag in step S1803, processing is executed in step S1804 to set the first CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the first CZ mode start command will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1805, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. In the ceiling game number lottery process, a ceiling game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current ceiling game number is randomly determined. The ceiling game number table sets numbers of games that are likely to be selected (e.g., 341, 682) and numbers of games that are unlikely to be selected or will not be selected, within a range that does not exceed the maximum ceiling game number (999 games in this embodiment). Furthermore, the ceiling game number table sets the minimum number of games to 100 games, and is set so that the ceiling game number will not be reached during the first CZ mode that is set when transitioning to the advantageous zone (more specifically, during the premonition mode when a transition to AT mode is won during the first CZ mode).

In step S1806, a process is executed to input the ceiling game number into the ceiling counter based on the processing result of step S1805. After that, the processing for the advantageous zone transition game is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the first interval display process, after executing the advantageous interval transition game process in step S1708, or if it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous interval flag is set, it is determined in step S1709 whether any of the CZ mode flags or AT mode flags are set. As already explained, in this embodiment, a push order notification can be made when the push order bell is won in AT mode or CZ mode, and a situation in which any of these flags is set can be said to be a situation in which the display start conditions for the interval display are met. If any of the flags is set, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in step S1710 to start displaying the interval display.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1711, processing is executed to continue display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1711, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 remains lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous zone flag nor the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, or if the advantageous zone flag or advantageous zone winning game flag is set but the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is not set and normal mode is selected, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification occurs, i.e., the number of games in the normal zone and non-specific zone.

Furthermore, after executing the display start process for the section indicator in step S1710 and the display continuation process in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, the process adds 1 to the second role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The second role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games that can generate a push order notification, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1712 or step S1713, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1714. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games played). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games played. Then, in step S1715, a process is executed to display the calculation processing result of step S1714 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment displays consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the winning combination monitor 77 has the following 7-segment displays: a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e. Like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, the display segments in the first display unit 77a through the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows each winning combination monitor 77 to individually display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers), and in particular, the winning combination monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1715, the result of the calculation process in step S1714 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a-77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and with four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the percentage of the total number of games in which a push order notification may occur. After the processing of step S1715 is executed, the first section display processing is terminated.

Note that the calculation process in step S1714 may involve rounding off numbers to the fifth decimal point before controlling the display of the winning ratio monitor 77. Furthermore, since the first display unit 77a of the winning ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0," the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It may also be desirable to have a decimal point displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 48. As already explained, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medal payout (payout determination process) and a transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been performed at the end of one game.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1902, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. After the process in step S1902 is executed, in step S1903, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1903, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of this subtraction is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1903, a remaining game count management process is executed in step S1904, followed by a remaining coin count management process in the following step S1905. The remaining game count management process is a process for managing whether the current remaining number of games is sufficient to reach the upper limit of the advantageous zone (1,500 games) based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining game count management process determines, for example, whether the sum of the advantageous zone game count AG (number of games played in the advantageous zone), the AT counter (number of games remaining in AT mode), the CZ counter (number of games remaining in CZ mode), and the premonition counter (number of games remaining in premonition mode) is greater than the upper limit of the advantageous zone. If such a situation exists, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. The remaining coin management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit increase (2,400 coins) with the current remaining number of games, based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining payout coin management process determines whether the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT counter and the average increase per game in AT mode, and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease coin number MY, is greater than the increase/decrease coin number in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify the situation.

Then, in step S1906, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY has reached the upper limit of 2400. If either of these conditions for forced termination is met, in step S1907, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of coins in the advantageous zone increase/decrease MY are cleared to 0. In the next step S1908, processing is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S1909, processing is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and in step S1910, processing is performed to clear the normal counter, and then this second zone display processing is terminated.

More specifically, the initialization process for advantageous zone information in step S1909 is a process that resets flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if advantageous zone flags, AT mode win flags, AT mode flags, various CZ mode flags, etc. are set and not cleared, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the advantageous zone game count AG, advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, premonition counter for premonition mode, counters for the number of continued games in CZ mode, etc. are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance of push order notifications for advantageous zones that are advantageous states using push order notifications, and is a process that clears RAM for such variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1906 that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of increase/decrease coins in the advantageous zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, proceed to step S1911 and determine whether the CZ end game flag is set.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in any of the various CZ modes, the CZ mode flag is cleared when the AT mode win flag is set (steps S808 to S810). The CZ end game flag is set when the number of remaining games in CZ mode (CZ counter) becomes 0 while the CZ mode flag remains set. Therefore, when the CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

If the CZ mode end game flag is set in step S1911, it is determined in step S1912 whether the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set.

If the second CZ mode flag or third CZ mode flag is set in step S1912, and the second CZ mode, which is set in response to winning the CZ mode transition lottery during the favorable zone, or the third CZ mode, which is set in response to the end of AT mode, ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, proceed to step S1907 and execute processing for the end of the favorable zone. On the other hand, if the first CZ mode flag is set in step S1912 instead of the second CZ mode flag or third CZ mode flag, and the first CZ mode, which is set in response to the transition to the favorable zone, ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, proceed to step S1913, clear the first CZ mode flag, and then terminate the second zone display processing.

In other words, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous period ends, whereas if the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous period continues without ending. Note that the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are cleared during the processing for ending the advantageous period (step S1909).

<Advantageous zones and display modes>
The relationship between advantageous zones and display modes will be explained with reference to Figure 49.

As already explained, this slot machine 10 has advantageous zones where push order notifications can occur and normal zones where push order notifications do not occur. A situation in which the advantageous zone flag is set is an advantageous zone, and a situation in which the advantageous zone flag is not set is a normal zone. The advantageous zone flag is a flag that is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. For example, when the setting values of the slot machine 10 are changed (processing to change the winning probability), initialization processing of RAM 106 is performed and the advantageous zone flag is also cleared. In other words, when the setting values are changed and the power is turned on, gameplay begins in the normal zone. In the normal zone, the display mode is set to normal mode, in which push order notifications do not occur.

When the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the normal zone, a transition to the advantageous zone occurs. More specifically, winning the advantageous zone transition lottery process sets the advantageous zone winning game flag, and the advantageous zone flag is set on the condition that the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in the first zone display process. Then, when the advantageous zone flag is set, a process for the advantageous zone transition game is executed, and in the advantageous zone transition game process, a process for setting the display mode to the first CZ mode is performed. Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous zone, a ceiling game number (maximum 999 games) is set.

The first CZ mode is set to a continuous game count of 8 to 10 games, and is configured so that there is a high probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode during the first CZ mode. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won in the first CZ mode, the transition to AT mode occurs mainly via the premonition mode. On the other hand, if the first CZ mode ends without winning the lottery to transition to AT mode, the display mode will transition to normal mode. However, in this case, the advantageous zone will not end.

When the game is in a favorable zone and the display mode is normal mode, a CZ mode transition lottery is held along with an AT mode transition lottery. If the CZ mode transition lottery is won in normal mode, the game will transition to the second CZ mode.

The second CZ mode is set to a continuous game count of 8 to 15 games, and is set up so that there is a high probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode during the second CZ mode, just like the first CZ mode. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won in the second CZ mode, the transition to AT mode occurs mainly via the premonition mode. On the other hand, if the second CZ mode ends without winning the lottery to transition to AT mode, the display mode transitions to the normal mode, and then the advantageous zone ends and the transition to the normal zone occurs.

AT mode is a mode in which push order notifications corresponding to the 1st through 6th minor features are generated when the push order bell is won, and is a mode in which many medals can be expected to be added. Once the push order notification is generated upon switching to AT mode, it becomes possible to achieve the 1st through 6th minor features when each push order bell is won, and the net increase in medals per game during AT mode is approximately 8.04 medals. AT mode starts with 50 games, and the remaining number of games is increased by winning the additional lottery. The probability of winning the additional lottery is also set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches 0, AT mode ends and the machine switches to the third CZ mode.

The third CZ mode is set to a continuous game count of 25 to 30 games, and is set up so that there is a high probability of winning the lottery to transition to AT mode during the third CZ mode, just like the first and second CZ modes. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won in the third CZ mode, a transition to AT mode occurs. On the other hand, if the third CZ mode ends without winning the lottery to transition to AT mode, the display mode transitions to normal mode, and then the advantageous zone ends and a transition to the normal zone occurs.

As already explained, in CZ mode, an AT mode transition lottery is held for each game using the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table is set to make it easier to win the AT mode transition than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. The CZ AT mode transition lottery table is also configured to use the point value earned in each game in CZ mode to determine whether the AT mode transition lottery will be successful. Given that an AT mode transition lottery is held for each game in CZ mode and that point values can be earned in each game in CZ mode, it can be said that the longer the CZ mode is set to a longer number of games, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode than in the first CZ mode, and it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the third CZ mode than in the second CZ mode.

In this case, although the first CZ mode is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the second or third CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the second or third CZ mode, the advantageous period ends, whereas if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first CZ mode, the advantageous period does not end. Therefore, from the perspective of the continuity of the advantageous period, the first CZ mode is more advantageous for the player than the second or third CZ mode.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 50.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 50, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, is off (not lit). In this normal zone, push order notifications are not provided. In other words, while advantageous zones have the ability to provide instruction functions such as push order notifications, normal zones are zones that do not have such instruction functions.

In the normal zone, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone by winning the seventh minor prize (watermelon), for example, the player transitions to the advantageous zone in the game where the winning trigger is realized, and that game is used as the starting game to begin counting the number of games played in the advantageous zone (counting the number of advantageous zone games AG). As described above, the first CZ mode is set upon transition to the advantageous zone, and a push order notification can occur in the first CZ mode. Therefore, in the advantageous zone transition game (first CZ mode transition game), the start conditions for the zone indicator display are met, and the eighth display segment N8 lights up. More specifically, the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the start of the advantageous zone transition game (first CZ mode transition game) (when the start lever 41 is operated).

After that, while the eighth display segment N8 is lit, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 display push order information ("1" through "6"), and the player can understand the push order based on this push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information begins to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game in question, and ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on in the game (when the stop switch 42 through 44 corresponding to the final reel is pressed). If the game in question is not the final game of the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information using the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel is stopped and turned on, while the display of the advantageous zone using the eighth display segment N8 continues. If a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role will be displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone ends and the game transitions to the normal zone. The conditions for ending the advantageous zone include the number of continued games or the number of medal increases reaching their upper limit, and in this embodiment, the end of the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery. When the advantageous zone ends, the eighth display segment N8 turns off when medal payout ends (by the second zone display process, which is the process that follows the payout determination process). Note that if medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 turns off when the third reel is stopped (when pressing the stop switches 42-44 corresponding to the final reel is completed).

As described above, a push order notification can occur when a player moves into a favorable zone, and the move into that favorable zone (move into a specific zone) and the end of that favorable zone are clearly notified by the eighth display segment N8. In other words, by checking whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is lit or not, it is possible to clearly determine whether the player is in a situation where they can at least enjoy the benefits of the push order notification (specific zone, zone where actual increase occurs). In this way, the manager of the amusement hall can clearly confirm, for example, whether an increase in medals has occurred by enjoying the benefits of the push order notification in a favorable zone, or whether fraudulent activity is being committed that results in an increase in medals by fraudulently enjoying the benefits of the push order notification even when the player is not in a favorable zone.

On the other hand, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends in the advantageous zone without winning the AT mode transition lottery, not only will the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode end, but the advantageous zone will also end. When the advantageous zone ends, the eighth display segment N8, which serves as the zone indicator, goes out, allowing the player to clearly understand that the advantageous zone has ended. In other words, when the eighth display segment N8 goes out, it becomes clear that the player did not win the AT mode transition lottery in the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode.

This increases the likelihood that play will be terminated based on the eighth display segment N8 going out. Furthermore, a gaming machine with the eighth display segment N8 out serves as a sign that the player did not win the AT mode transition lottery in the previous second or third CZ mode. For example, this makes it more difficult for a player to pick up a winning jackpot from a previous player's transition lottery. In any case, the extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8 can be one of the causes of a decrease in the operating rate of a gaming machine. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is equipped with a unique configuration that eliminates the decrease in operating rate caused by the eighth display segment N8 going out. This configuration is explained below.

<Performance setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 51. The effect setting process is initiated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the performance setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2002, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 is executed, step S2003 determines whether it is the timing before the start of the game. The timing before the start of the game is a state in which bet amount operations such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or operating the medal insertion slot 45 can be performed, or processing for setting a re-play state can be performed. During this timing before the start of the game, processing is performed to set effects corresponding to bet time commands from the main control device 101. A bet time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet amount operation performed, and is a command set in the bet processing of step S204 of the normal processing. In step S2004, bet time effect setting processing is executed to set effects based on the current bet operation based on the bet time command.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, or after the processing of step S2004 is executed, step S2005 determines whether it is time to start the game after a bet has been placed. The game start timing refers to a state in which operation of the start lever 41 is valid, and at such a game start timing, processing is performed to set the effects corresponding to the start command from the main control unit 101. Start commands are commands output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and include lottery result commands set in step S311 of the lottery processing, as well as premonition commands set in the lottery result response processing (FIG. 30) and the first section display processing (FIG. 46), first AT win immediate notification commands, second AT win immediate notification commands, second CZ mode start commands, additional commands, push order notification commands, first CZ mode start commands, etc. In step S2006, start effect setting processing is performed based on these start commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2005, or after the processing of step S2006 has been executed, step S2007 determines whether each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is spinning. If each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is spinning, processing is performed to set the effects corresponding to each stop operation command from the main control device 101. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 22). In step S2008, each stop operation effect setting processing is executed to set the effects based on the current stop operation based on each of the stop operation commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2007, or after the processing of step S2008 is performed, step S2009 determines whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, processing is performed to set an effect corresponding to the all-stop command from the main control device 101. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to the winning result command set in step S417 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22), there are also AT start commands, CZ end commands, first AT winning notification commands, second AT winning notification commands, AT end commands, third CZ mode start commands, etc., which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 43). In step S2010, processing to set the all-stop effect is performed based on these all-stop commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2009, or after the processing of step S2010 has been performed, other processing is performed in step S2011, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S2011, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, or stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

Below, we will explain the start-time effect setting process and the full stop effect setting process, and then we will explain the bet effect setting process.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-time effect setting process in step S2006 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S2101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a push order role win. If the push order role win is a push order role win, in step S2102 it is determined whether a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, in step S2103 it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is normal reply B. If the push order notification command is set in a game that is normal reply B, this means that this is the start game of the first AT mode, and in this case, in step S2104, a setting process is executed to perform a push order notification effect corresponding to a second replay win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, a judgment is made in step S2105 as to whether the lottery result for this game is normal lip C. If the push order notification command is set in a game that is normal lip C, this means that this is the start game of the second AT mode, and in this case, setting processing is executed in step S2106 to perform the push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, this means that the lottery result for this game is a push order bell win. In this case, in step S2107, settings are executed to display push order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small wins on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101 or step S2102, or after executing any of steps S2104, S2106, and S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether the current time is a specific wait period, which is a period before the wait time has elapsed. As described above, if the wait time has not elapsed between the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R at the start of a game and the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R at the start of the next game, the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is put on hold. In this embodiment, the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, can determine whether the wait time has elapsed using a timer counter or the like. If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, the process executes a process in step S2109 to turn on the wait display unit 78, and then returns to step S2108. If the wait display unit 78 is already lit in step S2109, it will remain lit.

If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2110, where the wait display unit 78 is turned off. If the wait display unit 78 is already turned off, that state is maintained. Subsequently, the process executes steps S2111 through S2122 to set the effects to be displayed when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. In other words, the push order notification effects executed in steps S2101 through S2107 are executed based on operation of the start lever 41 even before the wait period has elapsed, while the various start effects set in steps S2111 through S2122 are not executed unless the wait period has elapsed, even if the start lever 41 is operated, and are instead executed when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning.

For simplicity's sake, the explanation uses a loop process in which, if it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, the process of step S2109 is executed and then the process waits until the wait period has elapsed. However, the start-up effect setting process may also be terminated. This can eliminate the inconvenience of the start-up effect setting process not completing until the wait period has elapsed. This also applies to other loop processes.

The effect setting process executed when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin begins with a determination in step S2111 as to whether the lottery result for the current game is a win for a specific role. A specific role is a lottery result known as a rare role that is unlikely to appear (become a win) as a lottery result for each game. In this embodiment, Chance Eye A through Chance Eye C, Cherry A through Cherry C, and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in Figures 33 and 34, the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results is set to be more likely to result in a win for the AT mode transition than a lottery result other than a specific role. If the lottery result for the current game is a win for a specific role, a specific role notification process is executed in step S2112. The specific role notification process executes settings to have the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 notify the player that the lottery result for the current game is one of the above specific roles. For example, as shown in Figure 55(b), a special role notification effect is set up in which three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2111, or after executing the processing of step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether an add-on command has been received. If an add-on command has been received, the process of setting the add-on effect is executed in step S2114. In the process of setting the add-on effect, an add-on effect is executed in which the number of games added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification corresponding to the addition of the number of games remaining in the AT mode. Note that the form of the add-on effect is not limited to a form executed in the game in which the add-on was executed, and may include, for example, a form in which the number of games added is notified a predetermined number of times after the game in which the add-on was executed, or, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a form is included in a so-called post-add-on effect in which an add-on effect is executed when the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining).

If a negative judgment is made in step S2113, or after executing the processing of step S2114, step S2115 determines whether a first AT winning instant notification command or a second AT winning instant notification command has been received. The first AT winning instant notification command and the second AT winning instant notification command are commands output from the main control unit 101 when the AT mode transition lottery is won and the instant notification lottery is won. If these commands have been received, step S2116 executes settings to display the corresponding AT winning instant notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the AT winning instant notification effect displays the text "AT confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display unit 65 and outputs a corresponding sound effect from the speaker 64. Note that the AT winning instant notification effect clearly indicates whether the first AT or the second AT has been won based on the received instant notification command. For example, it is possible to clearly understand which AT mode the player has won by using a different background color for the auxiliary display unit 65 in the AT win instant notification effect when the first AT mode has been won and when the second AT mode has been won. Alternatively, it is also possible to use the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64 to indicate that the first AT or the second AT has been won, without explicitly indicating whether the first AT or the second AT has been won. In this way, it is possible to avoid eliminating the gameplay element of looking forward to finding out which AT has been won after the AT win instant notification effect and until the AT start game.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2115, or after the processing of step S2116 has been executed, step S2117 determines whether or not a premonition command has been received. As already explained, the premonition command is a command output when the AT mode transition lottery is won but the immediate notification lottery is not won (step S1105: NO) in the AT lottery processing (Figure 29) on the main control unit 101 side, and includes information that the AT mode win flag has been set, as well as information on the number of games from the game in question (the game in which the AT mode win flag was set) to the game in which the AT win notification effect should be performed (the value of the premonition counter). If a premonition command has been received, step S2118 executes the premonition effect setting processing.

The premonition effect setting process sets consecutive effects that can be executed continuously across multiple games as premonition effects. In this embodiment, the consecutive effects are configured to notify the winner of the AT mode transition lottery in the final game, and the consecutive effects set in the premonition effect setting process are configured to notify the winner of the AT mode in the final game of the consecutive effects.

In the premonition effect setting process, if the display mode that wins the AT mode transition lottery is not the first CZ mode, but the second CZ mode, third CZ mode, or normal mode, the continuous effects are set so that the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) will be announced after the number of games equivalent to the number of premonition games included in the premonition command. As already explained, the second CZ mode continues for 8 to 15 games, and the number of premonition games when the AT mode transition is won is set to 13 to 15 games, so the number of games from the transition to the second CZ mode until the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) is announced will be anywhere from 13 to 30 games. In this embodiment, when the game transitions to the second CZ mode, a continuous effect is set to start, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the second CZ mode, the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is announced from the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous effect that started when the game transitioned to the second CZ mode. Furthermore, the third CZ mode continues for 25 to 30 games, and the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode is set as the number of premonition games when the game transition to the AT mode is won. In other words, the number of games from the transition to the third CZ mode until the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is announced is between 25 and 30 games. In this embodiment, the continuous performance is set to start even when transitioning to the third CZ mode, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the third CZ mode, the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) will be announced between the 25th and 30th games of the continuous performance that started when transitioning to the third CZ mode.

In contrast, if the display mode that wins the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode, a determination is made as to whether a continuous effect has already begun. If a continuous effect has not begun, the continuous effect is set so that the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) will be announced after the number of games corresponding to the premonition game number included in the premonition command. Since the first CZ mode is played over 8 to 10 games, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode, the number of premonition games is set to 5, the number of games from the transition to the first CZ mode until the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) is announced will be anywhere from 5 to 15 games. Furthermore, if the display mode that wins the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode and a continuous effect has already begun, processing is performed to set the remaining number of games in the continuous effect to the current premonition game number. As described above, when the second CZ mode is entered, a continuous effect is set to start. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the second CZ mode does not win the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous effect is set to continue. Therefore, when the continuous effect has already started in the first CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, it means that the continuous effect that started at the start of the second CZ mode is continued. As described above, since the second CZ mode continues for 8 to 15 games, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, the number of games from the start of the continuous effect when entering the second CZ mode to the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be between 13 and 30 games, excluding the number of games in the normal section. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, and the normal interval is considered to be one game, the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode win notification) will be announced between the 14th and 31st games of the continuous performance that started when the second CZ mode was transitioned to.

In this case, particularly when the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is announced in the continuous performance started upon transition to the second CZ mode, if the first CZ mode is not used, the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be announced from the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous performance, but if the first CZ mode is used, the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be announced from the 14th game to the 31st game of the continuous performance. Therefore, when the result of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is announced from the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous performance started upon transition to the second CZ mode, it becomes difficult to determine from the number of games in the continuous performance whether the first CZ mode has been used, i.e., whether the advantageous zone has temporarily ended. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the number of consecutive games in which a non-winning result of the AT mode transition lottery is played is set to match the number of games in which such an AT mode winning notification is played. Therefore, for example, when a consecutive performance starts in the second CZ mode, it becomes difficult to determine whether the advantageous zone has ended during the consecutive performance from the content and number of games played, making it difficult to end play when the advantageous zone ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time effect setting process, if a negative judgment is made in step S2117 or after executing the process of step S2118, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, it is determined whether a first CZ mode start command or a second CZ mode start command has been received. If either CZ mode start command has been received, the CZ mode start setting process is executed in step S2120. If a first CZ mode start command has been received and a continuous effect is not continuing, a new first CZ mode effect is started, and if a continuous effect is continuing, the continuous effect is continued. Also, as described above, in this embodiment, a continuous effect is started when the second CZ mode starts, and if a second CZ mode start command has been received, the CZ mode start setting process is set to start a continuous effect for a number of games longer than the total number of continuing games in the second CZ mode and the number of continuing games in the first CZ mode that may be executed thereafter. This makes it possible to create a situation where the continuous effects continue when the first CZ mode starts (when the advantageous zone transitions) even if the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2119, or after the processing of step S2120 has been executed, the continuous effect setting processing is executed in step S2121. As described above, the continuous effect setting processing is a processing for setting the continuous effect for each game that can continue across multiple games when notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery, and for setting the continuous effect in the event that the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

Then, in step S2122, other start-up effect setting processes are executed, and then this start-up effect setting process is terminated. In step S2122, for example, effects suggesting the lottery results are set in response to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. are performed.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process of step S2010 will be described with reference to Fig. 53. As already explained, the all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting effects when a newly received command is an all-stop command such as a winning result command, an AT start command, a CZ end command, a first AT winning notification command, a second AT winning notification command, an AT end command, or a third CZ mode start command.

In step S2201, it is determined whether a first AT winning notification command or a second AT winning notification command has been received. The first AT winning command or the second AT winning notification command is output from the main control device 101 when the AT mode winning flag is set and the premonition counter reaches 0. If one of these AT winning notification commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S2202, where settings are made to display the corresponding AT winning notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64 as a betting effect for the next game. The AT winning notification effect is a display that occurs after announcing that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the final game of the consecutive effects set as described above. For example, if the consecutive effects are set as a battle effect in which an ally character battles an enemy character, an effect in which the ally character wins the battle effect may be displayed in the final game of the consecutive effects, and then an effect in which the ally character rejoices when a bet is placed on the next game may be set as the AT winning notification effect. The AT winning notification effect set here is executed as a bet effect for the next game when a bet operation is performed, such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57, or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 45.

If it is determined in step S2201 that an AT win notification command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether an AT start command has been received. An AT start command is received when a push order notification effect for a second replay or a third replay is being performed at the start of the game. In this case, in step S2204, settings are executed to display the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the AT start effect displays on the auxiliary display unit 65 a start replay symbol corresponding to the type of AT mode being started this time (such as a diagonal alignment of "BAR" symbols corresponding to a second replay in the first AT mode (FIG. 14(a)) or a bottom row alignment of "white 7" symbols corresponding to a third replay in the second AT mode (FIG. 14(c))), along with the text "AT Start!!", and a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If an AT start command has not been received in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, settings are executed in step S2206 to display an AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, as shown in Figure 55(a), the AT end effect displays the number of games continued in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If an AT end command has not been received in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether a third CZ mode start command has been received. If a third CZ mode start command has been received, third CZ mode effect start processing is executed in step S2208. In the third CZ mode effect start processing, a continuous effect is set to start over the number of continuing games in the current third CZ mode (25 to 30 games).

If it is determined in step S2207 that the third CZ mode start command has not been received, then in step S2209 it is determined whether a CZ mode end command has been received. If a CZ end command has been received, then in step S2210, the effect setting process for CZ end is executed. In the effect setting process for CZ end, if the CZ mode to be ended this time is the second CZ mode, the ongoing continuous effect is set to continue. Furthermore, if the CZ mode to be ended this time is the first CZ mode, and the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, i.e., if the continuous effect of the second CZ mode is continued and an effect from the first CZ mode is performed, then the continuous effect is ended as is. If the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode without going through the second CZ mode, then the continuous effect set in the first CZ mode is set to continue. Furthermore, if the CZ mode to be ended this time is the third CZ mode, then the continuous effect set in the third CZ mode is set to end as is.

If the CZ mode end command is not received in step S2209, or after any of steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208, and S2210 has been executed, step S2211 executes a process to temporarily store information about the game results of the current game (lottery results and information about whether or not a win was won) and information about the number of bets on the current game. Then, in step S2212, other all-stop effect setting processes are executed, and then this all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S2212, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

In this way, in this embodiment, in a game where players transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone via the advantageous zone transition lottery, and by winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone, they transition to AT mode and can expect to win many medals, the transition to AT mode occurs mainly via CZ mode, eliminating the possibility that the subsequent content of the continuous performance set in the CZ mode will be predicted based on the end of the advantageous zone. In this case, it is not limited to CZ mode, and the AT mode transition lottery is executed according to the lottery results of each game, and it is set so that if the lottery result of each game is a specific role known as a rare role, it is more likely that they will win the transition to AT mode, and if the result is anything other than that, it is less likely that they will win the transition to AT mode.

As previously explained, the specific combinations in this embodiment are Chance Eye A through Chance Eye C, Cherry A through Cherry C, and Watermelon. Of these, Watermelon is a so-called minor combination result that results in the payout of medals, while Chance Eye A through Chance Eye C and Cherry A through Cherry C result in a replay result. By using replay results to set specific combinations in this way, it is possible to diversify specific combinations simply by increasing the number of replay results. Furthermore, for replay results that do not result in an increase or decrease in medals, it is possible to set specific combinations while minimizing the impact on payout rate. Furthermore, while normally achieving a first replay result combination, such as with normal replays A through C, it is also possible to achieve a second or third replay result combination at a predetermined timing (at the start of AT mode). This allows for different combinations of winning results and stop outcomes without changing the bonus awarded depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 through 44, and utilizes this in gameplay. Additionally, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of specific combinations by using, for example, RT states that increase the probability of winning in replay results, and using replay results to create specific combinations has significant benefits in terms of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, if a specific combination is composed of a small combination result and a replay result as described above, a small combination result requires the player to place a bet in the next game, whereas a replay result eliminates the need for a bet due to the automatic insertion of virtual medals, resulting in a significantly different progression of the game. Therefore, if a specific combination is achieved as a result of a replay, the difference with the small combination result, etc., can cause the player to feel extremely uncomfortable, which can hinder the smooth progression of the game and may even reduce their motivation to play.

In this embodiment, therefore, a special feature has been added to the notification method when a winning result consisting of a replay result among such specific combinations is achieved. Below, the notification method for the replay result will be explained. In the following explanation, the first replay result will also be referred to as a normal replay result, and replay results other than the first replay result will also be referred to as a specific replay result.

<BET display section and bet display section>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming panel 25 is provided with a bet display section 34 to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and a bet display section 75 is provided below and to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

As shown in FIG. 56, the BET display unit 75 has a first BET display unit 75a, a second BET display unit 75b, and a third BET display unit 75c. Each of the display units 75a-75c is configured to be switchable between a lit state (or a flashing state) and an unlit state, and the number of bets is indicated by the BET display units 75a-75c that are lit. For example, if the first BET display unit 75a and the second BET display unit 75b are lit and the third BET display unit 75c is unlit, this means that two coins have been bet; and if all of the BET display units 75a-75c are lit, this means that three coins have been bet.

As shown in FIG. 1, the bet display unit 34 also has a first bet display unit 34a, a second bet display unit 34b, and a third bet display unit 34c, and each of the bet display units 34a-34c is configured to be switchable between a lit state (or a flashing state) and an unlit state. Similarly to the BET display unit 75 described above, the number of bets is indicated by the lit bet display units 34a-34c.

However, as shown in Figure 16, the BET display unit 75 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the bet display unit 34 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the difference is that the BET display unit 75 is controlled by the CPU 102 on the main control unit 101 side, while the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 181 on the display control unit 81 side. Also, as shown in Figure 1, the bet display unit 34 is set to have a larger area that transmits light when each display unit 34, 75 is turned on on the gaming panel 25 than the BET display unit 75, and the bet display unit 34 is set to be more likely to attract the player's attention (be easier to understand) than the BET display unit 75. Note that the bet display unit 34 may be configured to be more eye-catching (easier for the player to understand) than the BET display unit 75, and may be configured to have a higher brightness or light output when lit, or the bet display unit 34 may be configured to be an operable device, or the number of bets displayed by the bet display unit 34 may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the game status display unit 76, like the BET display unit 75, is a display unit that is smaller than the bet display unit 34 and the first credit insertion switch 56. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 56, it has a replay status display unit 76a, a start-ready status display unit 76b, and an acceptance-ready status display unit 76c, and all of the display units 76a-76c are configured to be switchable between an on state and an off state. The replay status display unit 76a notifies the player that a replay status has been set, in which the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets on the current game. It is turned on when the replay status has been set and turned off when the game set to the replay status has ended. The start-ready status display unit 76b notifies the player that a start-ready status has been set, in which a game start operation can be accepted. It is turned on when the start status has been set and turned off when a start operation is accepted in the start-ready status. The acceptability status display 76c is used to indicate that a medal can be inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, and is lit when the medal is acceptable, and is turned off when medals cannot be inserted. More specifically, the acceptability status display 76c is lit when the medal path switching solenoid 46a, which guides medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to the storage path 47, is excited, and is turned off when the medal path switching solenoid 46a, which guides medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to the discharge path 48, is not excited.

<BET treatment>
Next, the BET process carried out in step S204 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the previous game was a replay result win. This determination can be made based on the information about the previous game stored in the medal payout process in step S214. If the game is the next game after any replay result win has been achieved, step S2302 determines whether the winning replay result is the first replay result as a normal replay result. A normal replay result win is possible if normal replay A to normal replay C are won. If normal replay A to normal replay C are won, a normal replay result win is generally achieved unless the right reel 32R is stopped first (Figure 39). If the game is the next game after a normal replay win has been achieved, step S2303 executes a process to set a normal replay flag in the various flag storage area 106d. On the other hand, if the game is the next game following the game in which a specific replay result other than the first replay result was achieved, step S2304 executes a process to set a specific replay flag in the various flag storage area 106d.

Note that the processing of steps S2301 to S2304 above may be performed during medal payout processing or payout determination processing.

After executing the processing of step S2303 or step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305, where the number of bets placed in the previous game is determined from the bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and the value of the bet counter is temporarily stored in a register or the like. The bet counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to determine the number of bets placed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2301, or after the processing of step S2305 is executed, the BET counter is cleared in step S2506. Then, in step S2307, processing is executed to determine the specified number of coins for the current game. As already explained, the specified number is the number of coins bet that allows the game to be played, and in any BB state, the specified number is set to 3 coins, and in normal game states other than the BB state, the specified number is set to 2 coins or 3 coins.

In the following step S2308, the process of turning on the acceptable status indicator is executed. Then, in step S2309, it is determined whether the normal replay flag or the specific replay flag is set and whether this is the next game in which either of the replay result wins has been achieved. If this is the next game in which the replay result win has been achieved, in step S2310, the replay setting process is executed.

<Replay setting process>
In the re-game setting process, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 58, first, in step S2401, a process is executed in which the re-game status display unit is turned on. In the following step S2402, a process is executed in which all BET display units are turned off. Then, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game flag is set. If it is not set and the game is the next game in which a normal re-game result win is achieved, in step S2404, a process is executed in which a normal BET command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The normal BET command is a command for controlling the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side.

After setting the normal BET command, the process proceeds to step S2405. Steps S2405 to S2410 are processes for automatically inserting virtual medals based on the normal replay result. That is, in step S2405, the process of incrementing the BET counter by 1 is executed, and in step S2406, the process of turning on (or blinking) the BET display unit corresponding to the BET counter result of this increment is executed. Specifically, if the BET counter is 1 as a result of the process in step S2405, the first BET display unit 75a is turned on; if the BET counter is 2, the second BET display unit 75b is turned on; and if the BET counter is 3, the third BET display unit 75c is turned on. Then, in step S2407, the process of setting the replay BET command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The replay bet command is a command for turning on the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 in conjunction with the lighting process of the bet display unit 75 in step S2406.

In the following step S2408, a process is executed to input 134 into the BET timer provided in the various counter area 106e. The BET timer is a counter that determines the interval at which virtual medals are automatically inserted, and the BET timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, and the value input in step S2408 becomes 0 after approximately 0.2 seconds.

In step S2409, the BET timer is reset to 0, and a determination is made as to whether approximately 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the processing of step S2408 was executed. If not, the process waits until this time has elapsed. If approximately 0.2 seconds have elapsed and a positive determination is made in step S2409, a determination is made in step S2410 as to whether the value of the BET counter is equal to the number of bets from the previous game temporarily stored in step S2305. If the value has not reached the number of bets from the previous game, the process returns to step S2405 and executes the process of automatically inserting virtual medals again. If the value of the BET counter has reached the number of bets from the previous game, a positive determination is made in step S2410, and the process proceeds to step S2411.

In step S2411, a bet end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The bet end command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that a series of bets has ended, and includes information about the current number of bets. In the following step S2412, a start possible flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The start possible flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a start operation of the start lever 41 is acceptable. In other words, if the start possible flag is not set, even if a start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, the start operation will not be accepted. Also, as already explained, a wait period is set in this slot machine 10, and the start possible flag is set so that it can be set before the wait period has elapsed. In other words, even if the start possible flag is set and a start operation of the start lever 41 is acceptable, and a start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, the start operation will be accepted, while the rotation start control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be put on hold until the wait period has elapsed.

After executing the processing of step S2412, processing is executed in step S2413 to turn on the start-ready state display unit 76b, and then the replay setting processing is terminated. By turning on the start-ready state display unit 76b, the player can understand that the start operation of the start lever 41 is now acceptable.

On the other hand, if the specific replay flag was set in step S2403 and this is the next game in which a specific replay result win has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, a process is executed to set a specific BET command as an output target to the display control device 81. The specific BET command is a command for controlling the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side.

In the following step S2415, the number of bets from the previous game is input into the BET counter. Then, in step S2416, the BET display units 75a to 75c corresponding to the value input into the BET counter are turned on. That is, if 1 is input into the BET counter in step S2415, only the first BET display unit 75a is turned on; if 2 is input into the BET counter, the first BET display unit 75a and the second BET display unit 75b are turned on, while the third BET display unit 75c remains off; and if 3 is input into the BET counter, all BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on.

After executing the processing of step S2416, the process proceeds to step S2411, where the bet end command and start possible flag are set, the start possible status display unit 76b is turned on, and then the replay setting process is terminated.

In other words, the process of automatically inserting virtual medals based on winning replay results is set to complete in a shorter time when automatic insertion is based on winning a specific replay result than when automatic insertion is based on winning a normal replay result.

Returning to the explanation of the bet processing, if no replay flags are set in step S2309, or after the replay setting processing has been executed in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311. The processing in steps S2311 to S2319 is for setting bets and credits by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or by operating the credit insertion switches 56 and 57.

That is, in step S2311, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter provided in the various counter area 106e is at the upper limit (50). The credit counter corresponds to the credit displayed on the credit display unit 60, and corresponds to the virtual game medium storage means of the CPU 102. If the credit counter has not reached the upper limit, in step S2312 the medal path switching solenoid 46a is energized so that medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the storage path 47. On the other hand, if the credit counter is at the upper limit, in step S2313 the medal path switching solenoid 46a is deenergized so that medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the discharge path 48.

After executing the processing of step S2312 or step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314. The processing of steps S2314 to S2319 is performed when a bet operation such as inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45, operating the first credit insertion switch 56, or operating the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed.

That is, in step S2314, it is determined whether a medal has been inserted through the medal insertion slot 45. In this embodiment, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a is provided upstream (toward the medal insertion slot 45) of the selector 46, which is provided with the medal path switching solenoid 46a, in the path through which the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 passes, and the CPU 102 can determine that a medal has been inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. If a medal has been inserted, medal insertion response processing is executed in step S2315.

If no medals have been inserted, proceed to step S2316, where a determination is made as to whether the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated based on the detection result of the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a. If the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, a first operation response process is executed in step S2317.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 has not been operated, in step S2318, it is determined whether the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated based on the detection result of the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a. If the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, in step S2319, a second operation response process is executed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2315, S2317, and S2319, or after a negative determination is made in step S2318, it is determined in step S2320 whether the start possible flag is set. If it is not set, the process returns to step S2311; if the start possible flag is set, the BET process is terminated.

The medal insertion response process, first operation response process, and second operation response process are explained below.

<Medal insertion processing>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59 , the medal insertion processing first determines whether the specific re-play flag is set. If the specific re-play flag is not set and no specific re-play result win was achieved in the previous game, step S2502 determines whether the normal re-play flag is set. If the normal re-play flag is not set and no normal re-play result win was achieved in the previous game, i.e., if the current state is not set to the re-play state, step S2503 proceeds to determine whether the BET counter has reached the specified number. As described above, the specified number for the current game is determined in step S2307. In addition, in any BB state, the specified number is set to three coins, and in states other than the BB state, the specified number is set to two or three coins. In step S2503, if the BET counter is 3 in the BB state, a positive determination is made, and in states other than the BB state, it is determined whether the larger of the specified numbers of two or three coins has been reached. That is, in a state other than the BB state, if the BET counter is 3, an affirmative determination is made.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2503, the BET counter is incremented by 1 in step S2504. In other words, when the specified number of coins is set to 2 or 3, it is possible to change from a state in which a game with the specified number of coins (2-bet game) can be started with 2 coins to a state in which a game with the specified number of coins (3-bet game) can be started by inserting one more coin.

In the following step S2505, it is determined whether the BET counter has reached a specified number as a result of the current medal insertion. If the specified number has been reached, it is determined in step S2506 whether the start possible flag has been set. If the start possible flag has not been set, processing is executed to set the start possible flag in step S2507, and processing is executed to turn on the start possible status display unit 76b in step S2508.

If it is determined in step S2505 that the BET counter has not reached the specified number, if the start possible flag is set in step S2506, or after the start possible status display unit 76b is turned on in step S2508, a process is executed in step S2509 to set the inserted BET command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this medal insertion response process is terminated. The inserted BET command is a command that informs the display control device 81 that a bet has been set by inserting this medal.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the specific replay flag is not set but the normal replay flag is set, or if it is determined in step S2503 that the BET counter has reached the specified number of coins and the BET counter is 3 during the BB state, or if the BET counter is 3 during a state other than the BB state, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether the credit counter is 50. If the credit counter is not 50, in step S2511, the credit counter is incremented by 1, and in step S2512, an insertion increase command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S2513, it is determined based on the result of the processing in step S2511 whether the credit counter has reached 50. If it has reached 50, in step S2514, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, and in step S2515, the medal insertion response processing is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2510, or a negative judgment is made in step S2513, the medal insertion response process ends.

On the other hand, if the specific replay flag is set in step S2501 and a specific replay result win was achieved in the previous game, the process proceeds to step S2516, where a process is executed to set a specific insertion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The specific insertion command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to understand that a medal has been inserted in a replay state that has been set based on a specific replay result win. After executing the process of step S2516, the process proceeds to step S2510, where a process to increase credits is executed, provided that the credit counter has not reached 50.

In other words, in this embodiment, even when the replay state is set, it is possible to increment the credit counter by inserting a medal. In particular, in a replay state set based on a specific replay result win, inserting a medal will output a specific insertion command. The processing on the display control device 81 side when a specific insertion command is received will be explained in detail later.

<First operation response process>
In the first operation response process, which is the process when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 60, it is determined in step S2601 whether or not the specific re-play flag is set, and it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the normal re-play flag is set. If the specific re-play flag is not set, the normal re-play flag is set, and a normal re-play result win was achieved in the previous game, no bet is made by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, so the first operation response process is terminated. If neither the specific re-play flag nor the normal re-play flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, it is determined whether the credit counter is equal to or greater than one and whether one or more virtual medals have been stored. If the credit counter is less than one and no virtual medals have been stored, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 will not result in a bet, and the first operation response process is terminated. If the credit counter is equal to or greater than one, the process proceeds to step S2604, where it is determined whether the current BET counter is a specific number. As already explained, the specific number is the number of coins bet when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, out of the specified number. In the BB state, the specific number is set to three coins. In a non-internal state other than the BB state before the BB win, the specific number is set to two coins. In an internal state other than the BB state after the BB win, the specific number is set to three coins (see FIG. 24). If the current BET counter corresponds to the specific number, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 will not result in a new bet, and the first operation response process is terminated.

If the BET counter does not indicate a specific number, in step S2605, a process is executed to set the normal first operation command as the command to be output to the display control device 81. The normal first operation command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to understand that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated in a state other than the replay state where the credit counter indicates 1 or more.

In the following step S2606, the credit counter is decremented by 1 based on the current operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. Then, in step S2607, the BET counter is incremented by 1, and in step S2608, the corresponding BET display unit 75a-75c is turned on.

In the following step S2609, it is determined whether the BET counter has reached a specific number as a result of the processing in step S2606. If it has not, the process proceeds to step S2610, where it is determined whether the credit counter is 1 or greater. If the credit counter is 1 or greater and a further bet is possible with this operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, then in step S2611, the process of inputting 67 into the BET timer is executed. As described above, the BET timer is a counter that determines the interval at which virtual medals are automatically inserted, and the value input in step S2611 becomes 0 after approximately 0.1 seconds. In other words, when virtual medals are inserted by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the virtual medals are inserted at shorter intervals than the interval (approximately 0.2 seconds) when virtual medals are automatically inserted in the replay setting process.

In step S2612, the BET timer is reset to 0, and a determination is made as to whether approximately 0.1 seconds have elapsed since the processing of step S2611 was executed. If not, the processing waits until this time has elapsed. If approximately 0.1 seconds have elapsed and a positive determination is made in step S2612, processing is performed in step S2613 to set a consecutive bet command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then processing returns to step S2606. The consecutive bet command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that multiple bets have been placed by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, and the timing of those bets. In this case, the processing of steps S2606 to S2613 is repeated until the BET counter reaches a specific number (step S2609: YES) or the credit counter reaches 0 (step S2610: NO).

If the bet counter reaches a specific number in step S2609, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, a process is executed to set a bet end command as an output target to the display control device 81. As described above, the bet end command is a command for informing the display control device 81 that a series of bets has ended. Then, in step S2615, a process is executed to set a start possible flag, and in step S2616, a process is executed to turn on the start possible status display unit 76b, and then the first operation response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2610 that the credit counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S2617, where the above-mentioned bet end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this first operation response process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific re-play flag is set, processing is executed in step S2618 to set the specific first operation command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this first operation response processing is terminated. In other words, in the re-play state established based on the establishment of a specific re-play result win, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, no bet is placed, but the output setting for the specific first operation command is made. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific first operation command is received will be explained in detail later.

<Second Operation Response Process>
In the second operation response process, which is the process when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 61, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the specific re-play flag is set, and it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the normal re-play flag is set. If the specific re-play flag is not set, the normal re-play flag is set, and a normal re-play result win was achieved in the previous game, no bet is made by operating the second credit insertion switch 57, so the second operation response process is terminated. If neither the specific re-play flag nor the normal re-play flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether the credit counter is 1 or greater and one or more virtual medals have been stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and no virtual medals have been stored, no bet will be placed even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, and the second operation response process is then terminated.

If the credit counter is 1 or greater, step S2704 determines whether the BET counter is at the specified number. If it is not at the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2705, where a process is executed to set a normal second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81. The normal second operation command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to recognize that the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated when the game is not in a replay state.

In the following step S2706, the BET counter is incremented by 1, and in step S2707, the credit counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S2708, the corresponding BET display unit 75a-75c is turned on.

In the following step S2709, it is determined whether the BET counter has reached the specified number as determined by the processing in step S2706. If the specified number has been reached, the start possible flag is set in step S2710, and the start possible status indicator 76b is turned on in step S2711, after which the second operation response processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2709 that the BET counter has not reached the specified number, the second operation response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2704 that the BET counter is at a specific number, i.e., if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated even though the BET counter is at the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2712. In step S2712, it is determined whether the BET counter is at 3. That is, in a gaming state in which the specified number is set to 2 or 3, if the BET counter is at 3 and a positive determination is made in step S2704, a positive determination is also made in step S2712. If the BET counter is at 2 and a positive determination is made in step S2704, a negative determination is made in step S2712. If a negative determination is made in step S2712 and the BET counter is 2, the process proceeds to step S2705, where a further bet is made and the various processes corresponding to setting the BET counter to 3 are executed. Note that in this case, a negative determination is made in step S2709 and the start possible flag is not set, but the start possible flag was set previously (when the BET counter reached 2).

If the second credit insertion switch 57 is further operated while 3 has been input into the BET counter in step S2712, whether or not the BET counter is set to 1 (switching from a 3-bet state to a 1-bet state) is determined depending on the value of the credit counter. In other words, in step S2713, it is determined whether the credit counter is less than 49 and is in a state that allows an increase of 2 virtual medals when switching from a 3-bet state to a 1-bet state. If the credit counter is less than 49 in step S2713, the process proceeds to step S2714, where the above-mentioned normal second operation command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Thereafter, in step S2715, 1 is input into the BET counter, and in step S2716, the process increments the credit counter by 2.

In the following step S2717, the second BET display section 75b and the third BET display section 75c are turned off (the BET display section 75 is turned off to indicate a 1 bet). Then, in step S2719, the start-ready state display section 76b is turned off.

In the following step S2720, it is determined whether the credit counter has reached 50. If it has reached 50, in step S2721, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, and in step S2722, the medal acceptance status display unit 76c is turned off, after which the second operation response process ends. If the credit counter has not reached 50 in step S2720, the second operation response process ends.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the specific re-play flag is set, then in step S2723, a process is executed to set the specific second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this second operation response process is terminated. In other words, in the re-play state established based on the establishment of a specific re-play result win, not only when the first credit insertion switch 56 but also when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, no bet is placed, but the output setting for the specific second operation command is made. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific second operation command is received will be explained in detail later.

<Processing for game status display unit>
Next, the game status display unit processing in step S209 in the normal processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 62. As already explained, the game status display unit processing is performed after the bet processing and the like have been performed and the start lever 41 has been operated. Prior to this processing, the start-ready state display unit 76b and the acceptable state display unit 76c of the game status display unit 76 are illuminated. Furthermore, if any replay result win has been achieved in the previous game, the replay state is set, and the replay state display unit 76a is also illuminated.

In the game status display unit processing, first, in step S2801, processing is executed to turn off the start-ready status display unit 76b. Then, in step S2802, processing is executed to turn off the acceptance status display unit 76c, and this game status display unit processing is terminated.

That is, after the ready-to-receive state display unit 76c is illuminated (step S2308), the specified number of coins is bet and the ready-to-start state display unit 76b is illuminated (steps S2413, S2508, S2616, S2711), and then, if the start lever 41 is operated, the ready-to-receive state display unit 76c and the ready-to-start state display unit 76b are turned off. However, as already explained, a wait period is set in this slot machine 10, and there are cases in which the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R does not immediately begin even if the start lever 41 is operated. In this case, the timing at which the acceptability status display section 76c and the startability status display section 76b are turned off is when the start lever 41 is operated, not when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to spin. This means that the start operation has already been accepted and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are waiting to start spinning (wait period), making it possible for the player to clearly understand that there is no need to operate the bet number or start operation again.

<Bet effect setting process>
Next, the bet effect setting process of step S2004 in the effect setting process (FIG. 51) on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. The bet effect setting process is a process for switching each of the bet display units 34a-34c from an off state to an on state and outputting a bet sound effect when the replay state is set or a bet number operation is performed, so that the current number of bets is finally reported on the bet display unit 34. In the following description, the effect in which the current number of bets is finally reported on the bet display unit 34 is referred to as a bet-corresponding effect, and the effect in which the state of each of the bet display units 34a-34c is switched or a sound effect is output until the bet-corresponding effect is reached is also referred to as a bet process effect (specific notification).

In step S2901, it is determined whether the result of the previous game was a winning replay result. If a winning replay result was found, in step S2902, the bet effect setting process for the replay state is executed. Note that the information on the result of the previous game was stored in step S2211 of the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 22), and it is possible to determine whether a winning replay result was found based on the stored information on the result of the game. Incidentally, if the result of the previous game was not a winning replay result, or if the information on the result of the previous game is not stored (erased), such as in the first game after a reset such as a RAM clear, the process proceeds to step S2903.

In step S2903, it is determined whether the credit value stored in the various counter area 183b is 1 or greater. The credit corresponds to the credit counter on the main control device 101 side. If the credit is 1 or greater, a process is executed to turn on the first credit lamp 56b. By turning on the first credit lamp 56b, the player can clearly see that the first credit insertion switch 56 is ready to be operated. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may also be configured to flash.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2903, or after the processing of step S2904 is executed, step S2905 determines whether an insert BET command or a normal second operation command has been received as the current bet command. If an insert BET command or a normal second operation command has been received, this means that a bet operation has been performed in which one medal or one virtual medal has been inserted in a replay state based on the result of a normal replay or in a state other than a replay state, in which case single bet effect setting processing is executed in step S2906.

If no bet command or normal second operation command has been received, step S2907 determines whether or not a normal first operation command has been received. If a normal first operation command has been received, this means that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated in a replay state based on the normal replay result or in a state other than a replay state. In this case, step S2908 executes the consecutive bet effect setting process.

Normally, if the second operation command has not been received, or after executing any of the processes in steps S2902, S2906, and S2908, step S2909 determines whether an insertion increase command has been received. If an insertion increase command has been received, this means that the credit counter has increased in response to the insertion of a medal, and in this case, step S2910 controls so that a sound effect for increasing credits is output from the speaker 64.

After a negative judgment is made in step S2909, or after the processing of step S2910 is executed, other bet time effect setting processing is executed in step S2911, and then this bet time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2911, for example, the AT winning notification effect set in step S2202 is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64 based on the current bet number operation, and if the effect develops based on the bet number operation in a continuous effect, etc., processing is performed to execute such a development effect.

Below, we will explain the single bet effect setting process and the consecutive bet effect setting process, and then we will explain the bet effect setting process for the replay state.

<Single bet effect setting process>
The single bet effect setting process is a process that is executed when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 or when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the single bet effect setting process, in response to a bet being placed in the second operation response process on the main control device 101 side, a process is executed to create an effect that a bet has been placed on the bet display unit 34 side. Note that the bet effect that matches the bet in the second operation response process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as a single bet effect.

In the single bet effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 64, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag has been set in the various flags storage area 183a. The lights-out flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that any bets have already been made in the current game (including automatic bets made when setting the replay state). If the lights-out flag has not been set, processing is executed in step S3002 to set the lights-out flag.

In the following step S3003, a process is executed to turn off all bet display units 34a-34c. Then, in step S3004, a process is executed to turn on the first bet display unit 34a. In this case, the first bet display unit 34a is temporarily turned off, but is then immediately turned on again. This turned-off state is set to continue for a period of time that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp that the light has been turned off. Note that the first bet display unit 34a may not be turned off when turning off all bet display units 34a-34c in step S3003.

Then, in step S3005, control is performed so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated. Note that it is preferable that the bet sound effect and the credit increase sound effect described above be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, as this allows the player to understand whether a bet has been made or whether the credits have been increased.

If the lights-off flag is set in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether the third bet display unit 34c was lit before the current bet operation. If the third bet display unit 34c was lit, the process proceeds to step S3007, where the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may also be configured to flash. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003, where all bet display units 34a to 34c are temporarily turned off, and then the first bet display unit 34a is turned on (step S3004). This allows the player to understand that the state has changed from three medals bet to one medal bet, and that an additional bet is required by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. Note that if the first credit lamp 56b is already lit in step S3007, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the third bet display section 34c is not lit, then in step S3008, the bet display sections 34a-34c corresponding to the current bet are turned on. Then, in step S3009, it is determined whether the third bet display section 34c is lit, and if it is lit, then in step S3010, it is determined whether the specified number of coins for the current game is set to three. If the specified number is three and the bet is three, no further bet is required, so in step S3011, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, and then in step S3005, a bet sound effect is output, and then the single bet effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the third bet display unit 34c does not light up as a result of the processing in step S3008 (step S3009: NO), or if it lights up but the specific number is two instead of three, the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, and the bet sound effect output processing is executed in step S3005, after which the single bet effect setting processing ends.

<Consecutive bet effect setting process>
Next, the consecutive bet effect setting process of step S2908 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 65. The consecutive bet effect setting process is a process that is performed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a state other than the re-play state. In the consecutive bet effect setting process, in response to a bet being placed in the first operation response process on the main control device 101 side, a process is executed to perform an effect that a bet has also been placed on the bet display unit 34 side. Note that the bet effect that matches the bet in the first operation response process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as consecutive bet effect.

In step S3101, it is determined whether the lights-out flag has been set. If the lights-out flag has not been set, in step S3102, a process is executed to set the lights-out flag. Then, in step S3103, a process is executed to turn off all bet display sections 34a to 34c.

In the following step S3104, processing is executed to turn on the first bet display unit 34a, and in step S3105, control is performed so that bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3106, it is determined whether a bet end command has been received from the main control device 101. If a bet end command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3107 and waits until a consecutive bet command is received. As already explained, a consecutive bet command is a command that is output when placing the next bet after placing one bet when placing multiple bets based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and is output approximately 0.1 seconds after placing one bet. If a consecutive bet command is received, a positive determination is made in step S3107 and the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, processing is executed to turn on the second bet display unit 34b, and in the following step S3109, control is performed so that bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64.

Then, in step S3110, it is checked again whether a bet end command has been received, and if not, in step S3111, the process waits until a consecutive bet command is received. If a consecutive bet command is received, a positive determination is made in step S3111, and the process proceeds to step S3112. In step S3112, processing is executed to turn on the third bet display unit 34c, and in step S3113, control is performed so that bet effect sound is output from the speaker 64.

If a bet end command is received in step S3106 or step S3110, or after the processing of step S3113 is executed, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S3114, and then this consecutive bet effect setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the lights-out flag is set and a bet operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56 after a bet has already been made, the process proceeds to step S3115, where it is determined whether or not only the first bet display unit 34a is lit among the bet display units 34a to 34c. If the first bet display unit 34a is lit, the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are lit, and a bet operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56 with one medal bet, the process proceeds to step S3108, where processing is performed to light up the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3115 that all bet display units other than the first bet display unit 34a are lit, the process proceeds to step S3116, where it is determined whether the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are lit and the third bet display unit 34c is unlit. If a positive determination is made in step S3116, meaning that a bet number operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56 when two medals have been bet, the process proceeds to step S3112, where processing is performed to turn the third bet display unit 34c on. If a negative determination is made in step S3116, meaning that a bet number operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56 when three medals have been bet, it is assumed that three medals have been bet even though the specific number is two. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3103, where processing is performed to turn the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b on.

<Re-game state bet effect setting process>
Next, the re-play state bet effect setting process of step S2902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 66. The re-play state bet effect setting process is executed when the game result of the previous game is a winning re-play result, and the effect differs depending on the type of winning re-play result.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether a specific BET command has been received. If a specific BET command has not been received and the game result of the previous game was a normal replay result win, a normal replay bet effect setting process is executed in step S3202, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state is terminated. On the other hand, if a specific BET command has been received and a specific replay result win was achieved in the previous game, it is determined in step S3203 whether an AT win notification effect has been set as the effect at the time of the current bet. As already explained, the AT win notification effect as the effect at the time of the bet is the effect set in step S2202 in the effect setting process when the previous game was stopped. If an AT win notification effect has not been set, a specific replay bet effect setting process is executed in step S3204, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state is terminated. On the other hand, if an AT win notification effect has been set as the effect at the time of the current bet, a bet-compatible effect setting process is executed in step S3205, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state is terminated.

<Normal re-game bet effect setting process>
First, the normal re-game bet effect setting process in step S3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 67. In the normal re-game bet effect setting process, in response to the fact that the same number of bets as the number of bets in all games are placed in the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side, processing is executed to present an effect that a bet has been placed on the bet display unit 34 side. Note that in the following description, the bet effect that matches the bet in the re-game setting process on the main control device 101 side will also be referred to as a re-game bet effect.

In step S3301, processing is executed to turn off all bet display units 34a to 34c. In the following step S3302, processing is executed to set the lights-out flag. Then, in step S3303, processing is executed to turn on the first bet display unit 34a, and in step S3304, control is executed so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

The next step, S3305, determines whether a bet end command has been received. Note that in this embodiment, a 1-bet game is not set, and the number of bets in the previous game is either 2 or 3, so a negative determination is always made in step S3305.

In step S3306, it is determined whether a replay bet command has been received. As already explained, the replay bet command is a command output when placing the next bet after placing one in the replay setting process (Figure 58), and is output approximately 0.2 seconds after placing one bet. If a replay bet command is received, a positive determination is made in step S3306, and the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, a process is executed to turn on the second bet display unit 34b, and in step S3308, control is performed so that a bet effect sound is output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3309, it is determined whether a bet end command has been received, and if not, step S3310 waits until a replay bet command is received. If a replay bet command has been received, step S3311 executes processing to turn on the third bet display unit 34c, and step S3312 controls so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64, after which the normal replay bet effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S3305 or step S3309 that a bet end command has been received, the normal replay bet effect setting process ends immediately.

<Specific re-game bet effect setting process>
Next, the specific re-game bet effect setting process of step S3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 68. In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where a bet is not actually made (re-game state), a process is executed to create an effect as if a bet had been made. In the following description, the effect as if the bet had been made will also be referred to as a pseudo-bet effect.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether a bet end command has been received. As described above, in the replay setting process (Figure 58) based on a specific replay result win, even when multiple virtual medals are automatically inserted, the virtual medals are automatically inserted at once, and the bet end command is basically output immediately after a specific replay result win is established. In step S3401, the process waits until the bet end command is received. If the bet end command is received, a positive determination is made in step S3401 and the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402, it is determined whether the lights-out flag has been set. If the lights-out flag has been set and a pseudo-bet effect has already been performed, the specific re-play bet effect setting process is terminated. In this case, no pseudo-bet effects are performed from step S3403 onwards. If it is determined in step S3402 that the lights-out flag has not been set, in step S3403, a process is executed to turn the first credit lamp 56b on. In other words, in a re-play state based on a specific re-play result win, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, prompting operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may also be configured to flash.

Then, in step S3404, it is determined whether any of the following commands has been received: a specific insertion command, a specific first operation command, or a specific second operation command. If any of these commands is received and a bet operation is performed, such as inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or second credit insertion switch 57, during a replay state based on a specific replay result win, the process proceeds to step S3405, where the first credit lamp 56b is turned off.

In the following step S3406, all bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off, and a turned-off flag is set in step S3406. Then, in step S3408, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, and in step S3409, control is performed so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

In the following step S3410, the number of bets in the previous game, i.e., whether the number of bets when the replay resulted in a winning combination, was 1, is determined. The number of bets in the previous game is stored in step S2211 of the full stop effect setting process (Figure 53). The number of bets set in the replay setting process may also be determined based on the bet end command received in step S3401 as described above. Incidentally, since a 1-bet game is not executed in this embodiment, a negative determination is always made in step S3410.

If the number of bets in the previous game was not 1, proceed to step S3411 and execute the process of inputting 67 into the bet timer provided in the various counter area 183b. The bet timer is used to determine the interval between one bet and the next when a pseudo-bet presentation is being performed. The bet timer is decremented by 1 at a predetermined interval (1.49 msec), and the bet timer input in step S3411 reaches 0 after approximately 0.1 sec. In other words, the interval between one bet and the next bet in a pseudo-bet presentation is set to be longer than the interval between one bet and the next bet in a replay bet presentation, and the same length as the interval between one bet and the next bet in a consecutive bet presentation.

In step S3412, it is determined whether the bet timer input in step S3411 has reached 0, i.e., whether approximately 0.1 seconds have passed since the first bet display unit 34a was turned on, and if so, the process proceeds to step S3413. In step S3413, processing is executed to turn on the second bet display unit 34b, and in step S3414, control is performed so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64. Then, in step S3415, it is determined whether the number of bets in the previous game was 2.

If the number of bets in the previous game was 3 instead of 2, step S3416 executes a process of inputting 67 (approximately 0.1 sec) into the bet timer, and step S3417 waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If approximately 0.1 sec has elapsed since the second bet display unit 34b was turned on, the process proceeds to step S3418, where the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, and step S3419 controls so that a bet sound effect is output from the speaker 64, after which the specific replay bet effect setting process ends. Note that if a positive judgment is made in step S3410 or step S3415, the specific replay bet effect setting process ends without performing any further processing.

In other words, the pseudo-bet effect based on a specific replay result win is set so that the presentation style of the bet process effect leading up to the bet-compatible effect is basically the same as the presentation style of the bet process effect leading up to the bet-compatible effect in consecutive bet effects. Specifically, in either case, the bet process effect when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated sequentially lights up each of the bet display units 34a-34c at intervals of approximately 0.1 seconds, and the bet sound effect when these units are lit is also the same. This gives the strong impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor winning results and losing results, making it less likely that a specific winning combination will create a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the replay bet presentation based on a winning normal replay result is set up so that the presentation mode of the bet process presentation leading up to the bet-related presentation is different from the presentation mode of the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation based on a winning specific replay result and the bet process presentation in the consecutive bet presentation. Specifically, in the bet process presentation when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, in the normal replay bet presentation, the bet display units 34a-34c are sequentially lit at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds, whereas in the pseudo bet presentation and consecutive bet presentation, the intervals are approximately 0.1 seconds as described above. This also makes it easier to give the impression that the specific replay result is not a normal replay result, but is treated the same as other minor winning results or losing results.

Furthermore, as already explained, when the AT mode is started, the specific replay results, such as the second replay result winning or the third replay result winning, are realized. In this case, when the second replay result winning or the third replay result winning is realized and the AT mode is about to be started, it is possible to play the AT mode with a fresh mindset by prompting the player to perform the start operation after making a bet operation, rather than performing the start operation without making a bet operation. In other words, if the start operation is performed without making a bet operation, it gives the strong impression that the results of the previous game are being carried over, which is likely to be a mismatch with the intention of playing with a fresh mindset. From this perspective, prompting the player to make a bet operation when the AT mode starts can help increase the player's interest in the AT mode. Furthermore, for example, when announcing the degree of advantage (number of games, bonus performance, etc.) in the AT mode to be started at the start of the AT mode, announcing it in conjunction with the bet number operation rather than in conjunction with the start operation allows the player to know the degree of advantage before performing the start operation (triggering the lottery process). If a configuration is adopted in which a specific replay result win is achieved at the start of the AT mode and then a bet number operation is prompted, it becomes easier to add a configuration in which the degree of advantage of the AT mode is announced based on the bet number operation at the start of the AT mode, as described above, which also helps to increase interest. In this case, for example, the type of AT mode (first AT mode or second AT mode) may be announced based on the bet number operation in the start game (the game after the specific replay result win), or the initial number of games in the AT mode may be determined by lottery and then announced by the bet number operation in the start game.

If it is determined in step S3404 that none of the specific input command, specific first operation command, and specific second operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3420. In step S3420, it is determined whether a start operation command has been received and the start lever 41 has been operated, and if no operation has been performed, the process returns to step S3404.

In other words, after a winning replay result is achieved, the bet is set by the replay setting process on the main control device 101 without the need to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 or other bet amount operations, so it is possible to start the game by operating the start lever 41 without operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or other bet amount operations. The specific replay bet effect setting process then produces a pseudo bet effect based on the bet amount operation, but when a start operation is performed without such a bet amount operation, a bet-compatible effect is produced in which the number of bets for the game to be started is announced, without the pseudo bet effect being produced.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S3420 that a start operation command has been received, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S3421. Then, in step S3422, it is determined whether or not the wait period is in progress. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will immediately begin spinning upon receiving the current start operation command rather than during the wait period, all bet display sections 34a-34c are turned off in step S3423. Then, in step S3424, a lights-out flag is set, and in step S3425, the first bet display section 34a is turned on. In the following step S3426, it is determined whether the number of bets placed in the previous game was 1. If it was not 1, the second bet display section 34b is turned on in step S3427. Then, in step S3428, it is determined whether the number of bets in the previous game was 2, and if it was not 2, in step S3429, the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, and then this specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3426 or step S2428, this specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, when the replay state is set based on a specific replay result win as described above, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and a pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the bet manipulation, giving the impression that the replay state is being treated the same as other minor winning or losing results. However, it is also possible to know that the replay state has been set based on a specific replay result win from the stop results or the replay state display unit 76a, etc., and it is thought that there may be players who do not want to bother manipulating the bet even though they know that the replay state has been set. In this case, forcing a player to manipulate the bet is thought to significantly reduce the player's desire to play. In this regard, by allowing the start operation without manipulating the bet, as in the above configuration, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players.

Furthermore, if a pseudo-bet effect is displayed even when the start operation is performed without manipulating the bet amount as described above, it may cause a sense of discomfort to the player, and in particular, displaying an unnecessary pseudo-bet effect even when the player has specifically chosen not to manipulate the bet amount is likely to reduce the player's motivation to play. On the other hand, to ensure transparency in the game, it is considered that the bet amount for the current game should be announced.

As described above, when a start operation is performed without a bet amount operation in a replay state established based on a specific replay result win, the pseudo-bet effect is designed to display a bet-compatible effect without displaying a bet process effect. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the bet amount for this game without giving them a sense of incongruity.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, even if a start operation is performed, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will not begin unless the wait period has elapsed, and the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will wait until the wait period has elapsed. Also, as described above, in this embodiment, in the start effect setting process, the start effect based on the start operation is postponed until the wait period has elapsed. Therefore, if a start operation is performed during the wait period, the period until the wait period has elapsed will simply be a waiting time, and this waiting time may result in a decrease in attention to the game.

Therefore, in the specific re-play bet presentation setting process, if it is determined in step S3422 that the waiting period is in progress, a pseudo bet permission flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a in step S3430, and then the process proceeds to step S3406, where processing is executed to present a bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation. In other words, if the waiting period is in progress, even if a start operation is performed without involving a bet number operation, the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation can be presented, making it possible to effectively offset the above-mentioned waiting time with presentation effects.

Furthermore, in order to perform the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation during the waiting period, after the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, until the bet timer reaches 0 in step S3412 and a positive judgment is made (step S3412: NO), step S3431 determines whether the pseudo bet permission flag is set or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either of these is true, proceed to step S3432. In step S3432, it is determined whether the waiting period has elapsed, and if not, return to step S3412. Note that if the pseudo bet permission flag is not set in step S3431 and a new start operation command has not been received, return to step S3412 as well.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or a new start operation command is received and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3427, and processing is executed to turn on the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c.

Furthermore, after the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, until the bet timer reaches 0 in step S3417 and a positive judgment is made (step S3417: NO), step S3433 determines whether the pseudo bet permission flag is set or a new start operation command has been received, and if either of these is true, the process proceeds to step S3434 to determine whether the wait period has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3433 or if the wait period has not elapsed in step S3434, the process returns to step S3412. Then, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or a new start operation command has been received in step S3434 and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3429 and executes processing to turn the third bet display unit 34c on.

In other words, if a start operation is performed without a bet operation or during a bet process presentation, the bet process presentation is interrupted as the wait period elapses, and the bet-related presentation is performed as is. By doing this, it is possible to expect the presentation effect of the pseudo-bet presentation, while eliminating the sense of incongruity that would occur if a start operation without a bet operation were performed or if a start operation was performed during a bet process presentation.

<Bet-compatible effect setting process>
The bet-responsive effect setting process in step S3205 executes the same process as steps S3423 to S3429. That is, all bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off, and then the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play state are turned on. In this case, even in the re-play state based on a specific re-play result win, the bet-responsive effect is not performed through a bet process effect based on a bet number operation, but is instead executed when the re-play state is set without the bet number operation. This makes it possible to effectively avoid the overlap of the AT winning notification effect executed based on the bet number operation with the bet process effect or the bet-responsive effect.

<BET display section and bet display section>
Next, the relationship between the BET display unit 75 on the main control device 101 side, the bet display unit 34 on the display control device 81 side, and the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 and whether it lights up or not will be explained with reference to the timing charts in Figures 69 and 70. Note that in Figures 69 and 70, each game is a three-bet game, and the explanation will be made on the assumption that the credit counter is basically 3 or more.

As shown in Figure 69, in a game resulting in any of the minor winning combinations, when the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops at t1, a payout of medals corresponding to that minor winning combination occurs. When the payout of medals ends at t2, the first credit lamp 56b switches from an off state to an on state, indicating that operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is acceptable. At the same time, the acceptance status indicator 76c also switches from an off state to an on state (not shown). When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t3, the BET indicator 75 and the bet indicator 34 temporarily switch from an on state to an off state. Then, at t4, t5, and t6, the first BET display unit 75a and the first BET display unit 34a, the second BET display unit 75b and the second BET display unit 34b, and the third BET display unit 75c and the third BET display unit 34c sequentially switch from an off state to an on state, and a bet sound effect is output at the timing of each switch to an on state. Note that this series of effects from t3 to t6 corresponds to the bet process effect in the normal bet effect, and the state in which the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are on at t6 corresponds to the bet corresponding effect. Note that the interval between each bet in the bet process effect in the normal bet effect is approximately 0.1 seconds, as described above.

When the bet is completed at t6, the start ready status indicator 76b switches from an off state to an on state, and the game is ready to accept a start operation. Then, after the wait period has elapsed at t7, the start lever 41 is operated at t8 to perform a start operation, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin. Note that a lottery process is executed based on the start operation at t8, and the result of this lottery is a losing result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t9, this results in a miss as described above, and no medals are paid out. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b switches from an off state to an on state at t9, indicating that operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is available. Even if a small win is not achieved when a small win occurs, the first credit lamp 56b switches to an on state as the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop. Incidentally, if a freeze period for effect is set after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop, medals are paid out after the freeze period has elapsed, and then the first credit lamp 56b switches to an on state. Furthermore, if medals are not paid out, the first credit lamp 56b switches to an on state after the freeze period has elapsed.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t10, the BET display units 75a-75c and the BET display units 34a-34c are turned off, and then, from t11 to t13, a bet process presentation is executed in which the BET display units 75a-75c and the BET display units 34a-34c are sequentially switched to an lit state.

When the bet is completed at t13, the start ready status indicator 76b switches to an lit state, and when the start lever 41 is operated at t14, a lottery process based on the start operation is executed. However, since t14 is still within the waiting period, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not begin at t14. In this case, at t15, when the waiting period has elapsed, the rotation process of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the start operation at t14 is executed. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t14 will be the normal replay result.

Let us assume that the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins at t15, the wait period elapses at t16, and then the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops at t17. In this case, the result of the lottery process performed at t14 as described above is a normal replay result, and if a normal replay result win is achieved at t17, the replay setting process switches the replay status display unit 76a from an off state to an on state, and furthermore, the automatic insertion process of virtual medals is performed. That is, at t17, the re-play status display unit 76a is turned on, and further at t17, the BET display unit 75 and the bet display unit 34 are temporarily switched from a lit state to an unlit state, and then at t18, t19, and t20, the first BET display unit 75a and the first bet display unit 34a, the second BET display unit 75b and the second bet display unit 34b, and the third BET display unit 75c and the third bet display unit 34c are switched from a unlit state to a lit state, respectively, and a bet sound effect is output at the timing of each switch to the lit state. Note that this series of effects from t17 to t20 corresponds to the bet process effect in the re-play bet effect, and the state in which the BET display units 75a to 75c and the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit at t20 corresponds to the bet-responsive effect. As mentioned above, the interval between each bet in the betting process in the replay bet presentation is approximately 0.2 seconds, which is longer than the interval between each bet in the normal betting process. Incidentally, if a freeze period for presentation is set after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, the replay status indicator 76a will be lit after the freeze period has elapsed, and the automatic insertion process of virtual medals will be performed.

When the bet is placed through the replay setting process at t20, the start-ready state display unit 76b switches to a lit state. At the same time, the acceptance-ready state display unit 76c also switches from an unlit state to a lit state (not shown). Then, when a start operation is performed at t21, a lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t21 is treated as a normal replay result.

When reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t22, the result of the current game is a normal replay result, as described above, and, as in the case of t17, the replay status indicator 76a is lit and the bet process effects in the replay bet effect are executed from t22 to t25, with each BET indicator 75a to 75c and each BET indicator 34a to 34c sequentially switching to an lit state. In this case, although the wait period has not yet elapsed at t22, the normal bet effect is executed regardless of whether the wait period has elapsed. Since the normal bet effect is executed in the same manner before and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effects from t17 to t20 and those from t22 to t25 are executed in the same manner.

Then, when the bet is completed at t25, the start-ready state display unit 76b switches to an lit state, and then, at t26, the wait period elapses. When the start operation is performed at t27, the lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t27 is also treated as the normal replay result.

At t28, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, and from t28 to t31, the replay status indicator 76a lights up, and the bet display units 75a-75c and bet display units 34a-34c display a bet process. At t31, the start-ready status indicator 76b switches to an illuminated state. Unlike the start operation at t27, the start operation at t32 is performed before the wait period has elapsed. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not begin at t32 when the start operation is performed, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins at t33, when the wait period has elapsed.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the operation of the BET display unit 75, bet display unit 34, first credit insertion switch 56, etc. and whether they are lit or not in the case of a specific re-play result.

As shown in Figure 70, in a game resulting in a winning specific replay result, assume that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t42, which is after t41, when the wait period has elapsed. In this case, at t42, the replay status display unit 76a is turned on and the BET display units 75a-75c are turned off. Immediately thereafter, at t43, the BET display units 75a-75c are turned on so that the number of bets is the same as the previous number of bets. In other words, in the specific replay result, no effect equivalent to the bet process effect is executed by the BET display units 75a-75c on the main control device 101, and instead a bet-corresponding effect is executed. However, in the case of a specific replay result, the lighting process of the BET display units 75a-75c on the main control unit 101 is not linked to the pseudo-bet presentation by the bet display units 34a-34c on the display control unit 81, and even if the BET display units 75a-75c display the number of bets placed in the current game at t43, the bet presentation corresponding to the number of bets placed in the previous game continues on the bet display units 34a-34c.

At t43, the bet display units 75a-75c are illuminated, and the first credit lamp 56b is also illuminated, prompting the player to operate the first credit insertion switch 56. Furthermore, since the bet is completed at t43, the start-ready status display unit 76b is also illuminated. In this case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t44, a pseudo-bet effect is displayed by the bet display units 34a-34c from t44 to t47. That is, at t44, the bet display units 34a-34c are switched from an illuminated state to an unilluminated state. Thereafter, at t45, t46, and t47, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially switched from an unilluminated state to an illuminated state, and bet sound effects are output at the timing when each of the units switches to an illuminated state. Note that this series of effects from t44 to t47 corresponds to the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the state in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are lit at t47 corresponds to the bet-related effect. Note that the interval between each bet in the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is approximately 0.1 seconds, as mentioned above, which is the same length as the interval between each bet in the bet process effect in the normal bet effect and is set to be shorter than the interval between each bet in the bet process effect in the replay bet effect.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t48, since the wait period has already elapsed, the lottery process is executed at t48 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t48 is also considered to be the specific replay result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t49, the lottery result for this game is a specific replay result, as described above. As with t42, the replay status indicator 76a, start possible status indicator 76b, and first credit lamp 56b are turned on from t49 to t50, and the BET indicators 75a to 75c are turned off and then turned on again. Incidentally, since the result of the previous game was also a winning replay result, the replay status indicator 76a remains on at t50. It is also possible to turn it off at t50 and then turn it on again immediately afterwards.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t52 after the wait period at t51 has elapsed, a pseudo bet effect is displayed by the bet display units 34a-34c from t52-55, just as in the case of t44-t47. That is, at t52, the bet display units 34a-34c are switched from a lit state to an unlit state, and then at t53, t54, and t55, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are switched from a unlit state to a lit state, respectively, and bet sound effects are output at the timing when each unit switches to its lit state.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t56, since the wait period has already elapsed, the lottery process is executed at t56 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t56 is also considered to be the specific replay result.

As described above, in a replay state based on a specific replay win, the pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is a visual bet, and the bet has already been completed in the replay setting process. Therefore, it is possible to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by performing the start operation without operating the first credit insertion switch 56.

That is, at t57, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop, and from t57 to t58, the replay status indicator 76a, the start possible status indicator 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are illuminated, and the bet indicators 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then switched back on. After the wait period has elapsed at t59, if a start operation is performed at t60 without operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin spinning at t60. In this case, the bet indicators 34a to 34c are temporarily turned off at t60, and then illuminated at t61. Note that no bet sound effects are output at t61. In other words, in a replay state based on a specific replay win, if a start operation is performed without a bet operation, the execution of the bet process presentation is restricted and the bet-related presentation is immediately executed. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable because the bet process presentation has not been completed (is being executed) even though the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun.

Let's say that the start operation at t60 causes the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lottery result based on that start operation is also a specific replay result. After the wait period has elapsed at t62, if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t63, the replay status indicator 76a, start possible status indicator 76b, and first credit lamp 56b are turned on between t63 and t64, and the BET indicators 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then turned on.

Then, at t65, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the pseudo bet effect begins as described above. That is, at t65, the bet display units 34a-34c are switched from a lit state to an unlit state, and then, at t66, the first bet display unit 34a is switched to a lit state and a bet sound effect is output.

If the start lever 41 is operated to start the betting process at t67, which is before the period (approximately 0.1 sec) between when the first bet display unit 34a is lit and when the next second bet display unit 34b is lit, the wait period has already elapsed and the bet on the main control device 101 side has been completed, so the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin spinning at t67. In this case, the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect that began at t66 is stopped midway by the start operation at t67 and switches to the betting-related effect at t67. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable because the betting process effect has not been completed (is still being executed) even though the spinning of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun.

Let's say that the start operation at t67 causes the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lottery result based on that start operation is also a specific replay result. If reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at t68, the replay status indicator 76a, start possible status indicator 76b, and first credit lamp 56b are turned on between t68 and t69, and the BET indicators 75a to 75c are temporarily turned off and then turned on.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is then operated at t70, the pseudo bet effect begins as described above, since the wait period has not yet elapsed. That is, at t70, the bet display units 34a-34c are switched from a lit state to an unlit state, and then, at t71, t72, and t74, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially switched from an unlit state to a lit state, and bet sound effects are output at the timing when each unit switches to a lit state.

Furthermore, even if a start operation is performed using the start lever 41 at t73 during the betting process in the pseudo betting effect, the betting process will continue because t73 is still within the waiting period. Then, at t75 when the waiting period has elapsed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin to spin. In this way, even if a start operation is performed during the betting process in the pseudo betting effect, the betting process will continue if it is within the waiting period. This makes it less likely that a period will occur during which no effect is performed despite there being a waiting period, such as a waiting period.

However, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation before the wait period has elapsed, even if the bet process presentation is set to continue, the wait period may elapse before the bet process presentation ends. In this case, the bet process presentation is terminated and switched to a bet-compatible presentation once the wait period has elapsed.

In other words, let's say that the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins based on the start operation at t75, and the lottery result based on that start operation is also a specific replay result. If each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops at t76, the replay status indicator 76a, start possible status indicator 76b, and first credit lamp 56b are turned on between t76 and t77, and the BET indicators 75a to 75c are turned off and then turned on.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is then operated at t78, the pseudo bet presentation begins as described above, since the wait period has not yet elapsed. That is, at t78, the bet display units 34a-34c are switched from a lit state to an unlit state, and then, at t79 and t81, the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are switched from an unlit state to a lit state, respectively, and bet sound effects are output at the timing of each switch to the lit state. Furthermore, even if a start operation is performed using the start lever 41 at t80, during the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation, the bet process presentation described above continues, since t80 is still within the wait period.

After the second bet display unit 34b is switched to an illuminated state at t81, if the wait period elapses at t82, which is before the period (approximately 0.1 seconds) until the next third bet display unit 34c is switched to an illuminated state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin spinning at t82. In this case, the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation that began at t78 is limited midway by the start operation at t81 and the elapse of the wait period at t82, and switches to a bet-compatible presentation at t82.

<Standby state setting process>
Next, the standby state setting process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 71. The standby state setting process is a process for setting the slot machine 10 to a standby state (demo state) when no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and is a process carried out in step S215 of the normal process (Fig. 18).

In step S3501, a determination is made as to whether any of the gaming operations provided on the slot machine 10 have been performed based on the detection results of various sensors. Specifically, a positive determination is made in step S3501 when the operation of the operation units connected to the main control device 101, such as the start lever 41, stop switches 42-44, first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, and settlement switch 59, is detected by the corresponding detection sensors 41a, 42a-44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., or when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 (a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a) or the front door 12 is opened.

If step S3501 returns a negative result, indicating that no game operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S3502, where it is determined whether any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning. If all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, it is determined in step S3503 whether medals are being paid out. If medals are not being paid out, it is determined in step S3503 whether the replay state has been set. As described above, the replay state is a state set by the replay setting process based on the winning of any replay result. If the replay state is not in effect, the process proceeds to step S3504, where a process is executed to set an authorization flag in the various flag storage area 106d to allow the standby counter provided in the various counter area 106e to count. The standby counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to determine the timing to set the standby state.

If it is determined in step S3501 that any gaming operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3505, where the process clears the above-mentioned wait counter to its initial value (120,800). After step S3505 is executed, or if a positive determination is made in any of steps S3502 to S3503, the process clears the above-mentioned permission flag in step S3506. In this case, the timer decrement process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 17) decrements the wait counter by 1 if the above-mentioned permission flag is set, and does not decrement the wait counter if the permission flag is not set. The timer interrupt process is initiated every 1.49 msec, so it takes approximately 3 minutes for the wait counter to change from its initial value to 0.

After executing the processing of step S3504 or step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether any gaming operation has been performed. This processing is the same as the processing of step S3501. If a negative determination is made in step S3507, meaning that no gaming operation has been performed, it is determined in step S3508 whether the above-mentioned standby counter has reached 0 and the predetermined period (approximately 3 minutes) until the standby state is entered has elapsed. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, the standby state setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed, steps S3509 to S3514 are executed to set the slot machine 10 to a standby state. That is, in step S3509, a standby transition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The standby transition command is a command that informs the display control device 81 that the state will be set to a standby state.

In the following step S3510, the on/off status of the front light that illuminates each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R from the outside, the back light that illuminates each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R from the inside, and the back light for the game panel 25 provided inside the game panel 25 is stored in the standby memory area 106c of RAM 106, and these lights are turned off to enter a standby state. Note that if the front light or back light is already off, that state is maintained.

In the following step S3511, the information displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62 is stored in the standby memory area 106c, and the segments of each of these display units 60-62 are turned OFF to enter a standby state. In addition, in step S3512, the information displayed on the instruction monitor 68 is stored in the standby memory area 106c of RAM 106, and the segments of the instruction monitor 68 are turned OFF to enter a standby state.

In the following step S3513, the information displayed on the BET display unit 75 is stored in the standby memory area 106c, and the BET display units 75a to 75c of the BET display unit 75 are turned off to enter a standby state.

Then, in step S3514, if the start-ready status display section 76b of the game status display section 76 is in the lit state, the lighting information is stored in the standby memory area 106c, and then the start-ready status display section 76b is turned off, after which the standby status setting process is terminated.

In this way, when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, no payouts have been made, and the slot machine is not in a replay state, and no gaming operations are performed for a period of time exceeding a predetermined period, the slot machine 10 is set to a standby state. In the standby state, various displays are turned off, which allows for reduced power consumption by the slot machine 10. In this case, since the standby counter is not counted in the replay state as described above, the slot machine is not set to a standby state even if no gaming operations are performed. Furthermore, if the standby state is set when at least bet number operations are possible, the available status indicator 76c remains lit, allowing the player to clearly distinguish between this and a standby state in which the power is not turned on.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3507 that any game operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3515, where it is determined whether the current state is set to standby. If it is not set to standby, the standby state setting process is terminated. If it is set to standby, the process executes return processing to return from standby to normal state in steps S3516 to S3521.

That is, in step S3516, a process is executed to set a standby return command as an output target to the display control device 81. The standby return command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to understand that the device is returning from standby mode to normal mode.

Then, in step S3517, a process for restoring the various front lights and back lights is executed. In this process, the state of the various front lights and back lights before they entered standby mode is determined from the standby memory area 106c, and the process for restoring them to that state (on or off) is performed.

In the following step S3518, the state of the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62 before transitioning to standby mode is obtained from the standby memory area 106c, and processing is performed to return them to that state (on or off). Also, in step S3519, the state of the instruction monitor 68 before transitioning to standby mode is obtained from the standby memory area 106c, and processing is performed to return them to that state (on or off).

In the following step S3520, the state of the BET display unit 75 before transitioning to the standby state is determined from the standby memory area 106c, and processing is performed to return it to that state (on or off).

Then, in step S3521, the state of the start-ready state display section 76b of the game status display section 76 before transitioning to standby state is determined from the standby memory area 106c, and processing is performed to return it to that state (on or off), after which the standby state setting process is terminated.

<Standby processing>
Next, the standby process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 72. The standby process corresponds to the standby state setting process on the main control device 101 side, and is executed as one of the other processes (step S2011) in the performance setting process (Fig. 51), and performs processing for transitioning to a standby state or returning to a normal state, or processing for transitioning to a temporary standby state before transitioning to a standby state.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the above-mentioned standby transition command has been received. If the standby transition command has been received, in step S3602, standby processing is executed to place the auxiliary display unit 65 in standby mode. Specifically, the content currently displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is stored in the standby storage area 183c of RAM 183, the brightness of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to a standby mode brightness that is lower than the normal brightness, and text such as "Demo mode" is displayed. In the following step S3603, processing is executed to set the output volume from the speaker 64 to a standby mode volume that is lower than the normal volume (or no output).

In the following step S3604, standby processing for the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, the content currently displayed on the bet display unit 34 is stored in the standby memory area 183c of the RAM 183, and processing is executed to turn off each of the bet display units 34a to 34c of the bet display unit 34. In the following step S3605, standby processing for the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the on/off state of the first credit lamp 56b is determined, and this content is stored in the standby memory area 183c, and processing is executed to turn off the first credit lamp 56b. Note that if the first credit lamp 56b is already off, only that information is stored, and the off state is maintained.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3606 whether the above-mentioned standby return command has been received. If a standby return command has been received, in step S3607, return processing is executed to return the auxiliary display unit 65, which is in standby mode, to its normal state. Specifically, the content displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 before transitioning to the standby state is obtained from the standby memory area 183c, and that content is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and processing is executed to return the brightness of the display screen to its normal brightness. Furthermore, in step S3608, processing is executed to set the output volume from the speaker 64 to the normal output volume.

In the following step S3609, processing for restoring the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, the display content of the bet display unit 34 before transition to the standby state is obtained from the standby memory area 183c, and processing is executed to display that content on the bet display unit 34. Also, in step S3610, processing for restoring the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the standby memory area 183c is checked to see if the first credit lamp 56b was lit before transition to the standby state, and if it was lit, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, and if it was unlit before transition to the standby state, processing is executed to maintain that state.

After executing the processing of step S3605 or step S3610, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3606, proceed to step S3611. The processing of steps S3611 to S3622 is for the temporary standby state before the standby state.

Specifically, in step S3611, it is determined whether a game has ended. If medals are paid out at the end of the game, it is determined whether the payout has been completed. If a positive determination is made in step S3611, indicating that the game has ended, the process proceeds to step S3612, where a permission flag for allowing the display continuation counter provided in the various counter area 183b to count is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The display continuation counter is a counter that the CPU 181 uses to determine when to set the game to a temporary standby state. The display continuation counter has an initial value (15,000), and it will take 30 seconds for the display continuation counter to reach 0 after the processing of step S3612 is performed.

If it is determined in step S3611 that the game has not ended, or after executing the processing of step S3612, the process proceeds to step S3613, where it is determined whether any game operation has been performed. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S3613 when a command is received that is output when the operation of an operation unit connected to the main control device 101, such as the start lever 41, stop switches 42-44, first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, or settlement switch 59, is detected by the corresponding detection sensors 41a, 42a-44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., or when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 (a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a) or when the front door 12 is opened, or when the effect switch 66 connected to the display control device 81 is operated.

If step S3613 makes a negative determination and no gaming operations have been performed, the process proceeds to step S3614, where it is determined whether the display continuation counter has reached 0. If the display continuation counter has not reached 0, the standby process is terminated. In this case, other processing (step S2011) in the effect setting process (Figure 51) decrements the display continuation counter by 1 if the permission flag is set, and does not decrement the display continuation counter if the permission flag is not set. The effect setting process is activated every 2 msec, so it takes approximately 30 seconds for the display continuation counter to reach 0 from its initial value.

If the display continuation counter reaches 0 in step S3614 and the period until the temporary standby state has elapsed, step S3615 determines whether the game is in a replay state. If the game is in a replay state and no gaming operation is performed for 30 seconds, which is the first transition period until the game transitions to the temporary standby state after any winning replay result, step S3616 executes temporary standby processing for the first credit lamp 56b, and then terminates this standby processing. Specifically, step S3616 determines whether the first credit lamp 56b is on or off, stores this information in the standby memory area 183c, and executes processing to turn the first credit lamp 56b off. Note that if the first credit lamp 56b is already off, the information is simply stored and the off state is maintained.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3515 that the game is not in a replay state, temporary standby processing of the bet display unit 34 is executed in step S3517, and then this standby processing is terminated. Specifically, in step S3517, the content currently displayed on the bet display unit 34 is stored in the standby memory area 183c of RAM 183, and processing is executed to turn off each of the bet display units 34a to 34c of the bet display unit 34.

If step S3614 returns a positive result and it is determined that any gaming operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, a process is executed to clear the display continuation counter to its initial value (15,000). Then, in step S3619, a process is executed to clear the permission flag, and measurement of the display continuation counter is terminated.

In the following step S3620, it is determined whether the current state is set to temporary standby, and if it is not, the standby process ends. If it is in temporary standby, steps S3621 and S3622 execute the process to restore the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b, and then the standby process ends. This process is the same as the process in steps S3609 and S3610 above.

In other words, the display control device 81 has a temporary standby state set in addition to the normal state and standby state as states for presentation. The standby state corresponds to the standby state managed by the main control device 101, and is entered when approximately 3 minutes have passed since no gaming operations have been performed. The temporary standby state is a state managed by the display control device 81, and is entered when approximately 30 seconds have passed since the end of the game without any gaming operations being performed.

In this case, if no gaming operations are performed after the game ends, the device will enter a temporary standby state after approximately 30 seconds, and then enter a standby state again after approximately 3 minutes. When entering a temporary standby state, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off if the device is in a replay state, and the bet display unit 34 is turned off if the device is not in a replay state. When entering a standby state, not only the bet display unit 34 and first credit lamp 56b, but also the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are set to standby mode. If any gaming operations are performed after the game ends, the device will enter a standby state approximately 3 minutes after the gaming operation, without going through a temporary standby state. In other words, after approximately 3 minutes, the bet display unit 34 and first credit lamp 56b are turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are also set to standby mode. However, the device will not enter a standby state in a replay state.

<Temporary standby state and standby state>
The state in which the provisional standby state or standby state is set after a game will be described with reference to the timing chart in Fig. 73. Fig. 73(a) shows the state after a normal replay result, Fig. 73(b) shows the state after a small winning result, and Fig. 73(c) shows the state after a specific replay result.

As shown in Figure 73(a), if the lottery result of the game started at ta1 is a normal replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta2, the game is set to a replay state based on the winning normal replay result. In this case, the BET display unit 75 and the bet display unit 34 are temporarily turned off at ta2, and then turned on again corresponding to the number of bets equal to the number of bets at ta1. Note that the bet process presentation is omitted in this figure. Furthermore, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start of the game at ta1 (bet number operation), and remains turned off during the replay state.

As described above, when the replay state is set to the temporary standby state, the temporary standby process for the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby process for the bet display unit 34 is not performed. Also, when the replay state is set to the standby state, it is not set.

In a replay state based on a normal replay result, the bet display unit 34 is illuminated with a bet-related effect, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Therefore, at time ta3, when the first transition period (TA) from time ta2 to the transition to the temporary standby state has elapsed, the bet display unit 34 remains illuminated and the first credit lamp 56b remains turned off.

Even when the second transition period (TB) from ta2 to transition to standby mode has elapsed at ta4, the standby mode is not set because the game is still in the replay state. Therefore, at ta4, the bet display unit 34 remains lit and the first credit lamp 56b remains unlit. In addition, the bet display unit 75 remains lit, and the auxiliary display unit 65 does not transition to standby mode either.

As shown in Figure 73(b), if the lottery result of the game started at ta11 is one of the small win results, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at tb2, the small win result may be achieved. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b will be lit at ta12.

As described above, when the temporary standby state is set in a state other than the replay state, the temporary standby process of the first credit lamp 56b is not performed, but the temporary standby process of the bet display unit 34 is performed. Also, the standby state is set in a state other than the replay state.

If no gaming operations are performed from time ta12 until time ta13, when the first transition period (TA) for transitioning to the temporary standby state has elapsed, the temporary standby state is set at time ta13. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, but the bet display unit 34 switches from lit to unlit.

If no gaming operations are performed from ta12 until ta14, when the second transition period (TB) from ta12 to the transition to the standby state has elapsed, the standby state is set at ta14. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, the BET display unit 75 is also turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to standby mode.

If the lottery result of the game started at ta15 is also a small winning result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at ta16, the first credit lamp 56b will light up at ta16.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at time ta17, which is between time ta16 and time ta18, when the first transition period (TA) from time ta16 to the transition to the temporary standby state has elapsed, the corresponding bet is made and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Even though the game is in the replay state, the temporary standby state is no longer set by the bet number operation at time ta17, and time ta18 is reached, the bet display unit 34 remains lit, corresponding to the bet number operation at time ta17. If no game operation is performed until time ta19, when the second transition period (TB) from the bet number operation at time ta17 to the transition to the standby state has elapsed, the game is set to standby at time ta19. In this case, not only the first credit lamp 56b, which is already turned off, but also the bet display unit 34 and BET display unit 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is also set to standby mode.

As shown in Figure 73 (c), if the lottery result of the game started at ta21 is a specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta22, a replay state is set based on the winning of that specific replay result. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is temporarily turned off at ta22, and then turns on again corresponding to the number of bets equal to the number of bets at ta21. As described above, at ta22, the pseudo-bet effect of the bet display unit 34 is not performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on.

As described above, when the replay state is set to the temporary standby state, the temporary standby process for the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby process for the bet display unit 34 is not performed. Also, when the replay state is set to the standby state, it is not set.

Therefore, at ta23, when the first transition period (TA) from ta22 to the transition to the temporary standby state has elapsed, the first credit lamp 56b is switched off, while the bet display unit 34 remains lit. Then, at ta24, when the second transition period (TB) from ta22 to the transition to the standby state has elapsed, the standby state is not set. Therefore, the bet display unit 34 remains lit. Furthermore, the BET display unit 75 remains lit, and the auxiliary display unit 65 does not transition to standby mode either.

If the lottery result of the game started at ta25 is also a specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop at ta22, the first credit lamp 56b will light up at ta26.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta27, which is between ta26 and ta28, when the first transition period (TA) from ta26 to the transition to the temporary standby state has elapsed, a pseudo bet effect is produced and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even when ta28 is reached, the temporary standby state is not set by the bet number operation at ta27, and the bet display unit 34 maintains the bet-corresponding effect of the pseudo bet effect corresponding to the bet number operation at ta27.

And because the replay state does not transition to standby mode, even if no gaming operations are performed until ta29, when the second transition period (TB) from the bet number operation at ta27 to the transition to standby mode has elapsed, the bet display unit 34 will remain lit at ta29, the BET display unit 75 will also remain lit, and the auxiliary display unit 65 will not transition to standby mode.

In other words, the specific replay result, the small win result, and the loss result have in common the fact that the first credit lamp 56b is lit when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops, and the bet effects (normal bet effects and pseudo bet effects) by the bet display unit 34 when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. However, they differ in whether they are set to a temporary standby state or a standby state. After a small win result or a loss result, if no gaming operations are performed over the first transition period, the system is set to a temporary standby state, and the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, but the bet display unit 34 remains lit. After a specific replay result, if no gaming operations are performed over the first transition period, the system is set to a temporary standby state, and the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, but the bet display unit 34 remains lit. In other words, by not performing any gaming operations during the first transition period, it is possible to determine whether the result was a specific replay result or a small winning result, etc., based on whether the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display unit 34 are turned off.

In this case, if a gaming operation is performed before the first transition period has elapsed, whether after a specific re-play result, a small win result, etc., the game will not be set to a temporary standby state even after the first transition period has elapsed after the gaming operation. It is possible to determine whether the result was a specific re-play result, a small win result, etc., based on whether the standby state has been set when the second transition period has elapsed since the gaming operation. In other words, if one were to determine which result occurred based on whether the first credit lamp 56b or the bet display unit 34 was off, it would be necessary to suspend play for at least the first transition period. This makes it possible to realize a novel gameplay feature in which the result can be determined by not performing a gaming operation.

The embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the replay state established based on a specific replay result win, when a bet operation such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, a pseudo-bet effect is displayed in which a bet process effect is displayed and a bet-related effect is displayed. This allows the player to play in the replay state without changing the flow of the slot machine 10's series of game operations, such as performing a bet operation, starting the game, and stopping the stop switches 42-44. Furthermore, by doing the above, it is possible to give the impression that the result is treated the same as a small win or a losing result. This difference from a normal replay result, in which a bet process effect is displayed and a bet-related effect is displayed without performing a bet operation, can also create a sense of anticipation that some kind of bonus will be obtained, even with a replay result. This can help increase the enjoyment of the game.

In a replay bet presentation based on a winning normal replay result, a bet process presentation in which bets are placed at 0.2 second intervals is executed before switching to a bet-compatible presentation, while in a pseudo-bet presentation based on a winning specific replay result, a bet process presentation in which bets are placed at 0.1 second intervals is executed before switching to a bet-compatible presentation. The notification modes for the bet presentations based on both winning replay results are different. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the specific replay result and the normal replay result are clearly different, not only in terms of the operation modes for game progression but also in terms of the notification modes for the bet presentations.

In a replay state based on a specific replay win, the bet itself has already been completed in the replay setting process, and the start-ready state indicator 76b is lit. Therefore, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation based on a bet amount operation, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can begin even during that bet process presentation. Therefore, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation in a simulated bet presentation after a bet amount operation, the bet process presentation is interrupted as a restriction process for that bet process presentation, and a bet-compatible presentation is initiated at that point. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy because a bet-compatible presentation is not being performed even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun based on the start operation. It also prevents increased processing load and player confusion due to overlapping of the spin start presentation and processing with the bet process presentation and associated processing.

However, even if a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation, if the start operation occurs during the waiting period, the betting process presentation will not be interrupted and will continue as is. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the betting process presentation is interrupted even when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has not yet begun.

If a start operation is performed during a betting process presentation and the betting process presentation continues without being interrupted because the wait period has not yet elapsed, and the wait period subsequently elapses, the betting process presentation is interrupted and switched to a bet-compatible presentation once the wait period has elapsed. This prevents problems such as the betting process presentation not being completed even though the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun, or overlapping presentations and processing.

Furthermore, even in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, a start operation can be performed without a bet operation. Therefore, when such a start operation without a bet operation is performed, a bet-compatible effect is performed based on the bet operation without executing the bet process effect in the pseudo-bet effect. This eliminates the increased processing load caused by performing unnecessary effects, and also eliminates the inconvenience of not receiving a bet-compatible notification even though the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun based on a start operation.

Here, specific replay results are defined as replay results other than the first replay result. However, game results are also set in which the first replay result as a normal replay result and the second or third replay result as a specific replay result overlap, such as normal replays A through C. In this case, in the above embodiment, which of the first replay result, the second, or third replay result, will be won is determined by the operation sequence of stop switches 42 through 44 (Figure 39). During normal play, the system is set to generally favor the first replay result as a normal replay result, while when the AT mode is started, the system is set to favor the second or third replay result as a specific replay result. In other words, depending on the situation when normal replays A through C are won, a replay bet effect or a pseudo bet effect may be displayed. In this way, even in the replay state, by clearly distinguishing between situations where bet manipulation is not necessary and situations where bet manipulation is desired, it is possible to favorably expect the benefits of deliberately manipulating bets in the replay state.

In particular, when a player wins normal rep A to C, the scene where the second or third replay result as a specific replay result is won to create a pseudo-bet presentation is the scene where the AT mode is started. Therefore, when a new AT mode is started, by having the player perform a series of game operations such as operating the bet number and then performing the start operation, it is possible to help the player switch to a new mindset without being dwelled on the impressions of the previous game, and to increase the enjoyment of the AT mode.

Furthermore, in the replay state based on the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on and is turned off after the first transition period has elapsed. In contrast, after a small win result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, but remains on even after the first transition period has elapsed. This allows for the impression that the specific replay result is treated the same as the small win result by turning on the first credit lamp 56 and performing a pseudo-bet effect based on the bet amount operation, while realizing innovative gameplay features in which, to distinguish between the two results, the player simply needs to wait until the first transition period has elapsed. Furthermore, players who end their game despite having achieved a specific replay result win can be notified by the first credit lamp 56b being turned off. After the first transition period has elapsed, subsequent players will have a harder time notifying that a specific replay result win has been achieved, which contributes to fairness in the game.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the result is a specific replay result or a minor winning result, operating the first credit switch 56 switches the first credit lamp 56b to an off state. This means that if the player wants to determine the outcome after the first transition period has elapsed, they will need to refrain from operating the first credit switch 56. This creates a gameplay feature where the outcome can be determined by waiting, but one that requires stricter waiting, such as by not operating the first credit switch 56, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of such gameplay. In other words, while performing either game operation will prevent the setting of a temporary standby state, operating the first credit switch 56 will prevent determination not only in the temporary standby state but also in the standby state. Operating the first credit switch 56 can also be interpreted as an indication of intent to continue playing, and in such cases, it is unlikely that the player will suffer any disadvantage even if they are unable to determine whether the specific replay result will be a winning combination.

When the first transition period has elapsed, the bet display unit 34 switches from an on state to an off state if a specific replay result has been achieved, but remains on if a small win result has been achieved. After a small win result has been achieved, the bet display unit 34 is set to a standby state and the bet display unit 34 is set to an off state, but in the replay state, the bet display unit 34 is not set to a standby state even after the second transition period has elapsed. Therefore, after a small win result has been achieved, the bet display unit 34 is set to an off state, but if play ends with a specific replay result win, the bet display unit 34 remains on. In this way, by being able to clearly determine that a replay result win has been achieved by checking the bet display unit 34, inconveniences such as the manager of the amusement hall closing the amusement hall in that state can be avoided.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, with reference to Figures 74 to 77, we will explain another aspect when a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation, including a lighting presentation in which the bet display units 34a to 34c are sequentially lit during the betting process presentation, and a modified example in relation to the sound effects when betting.

Figure 74(a) shows the betting process presentation in the above embodiment.

When a bet number operation is performed at tb1, a bet process effect is executed in which the bet display units 34a-34c sequentially light up, and bet sound effects are output. When the bet process effect is completed at tb2, a bet-compatible effect is displayed. After that, when a start operation is performed at tb3, a lottery process is performed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin. If the result of the lottery process is a specific replay result, at tb4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a stop and the specific replay result is won, and a bet is set in the replay setting process.

At time tb6, after the wait period has elapsed (time tb5), when a bet operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like, a bet process effect is initiated in the same way as in time tb1, in which a bet sound effect is played and the bet display units 34a-34c are lit up. However, this bet process effect is a bet process effect in a pseudo bet effect.

If a start operation is performed at tb7, which is before tb8, when the bet process effect started at tb6 is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin. In this case, the bet process effect switches to a bet-compatible effect at tb7 (the corresponding bet display units 34a to 34c are lit). In other words, in the above embodiment, if a start operation is performed during a bet process effect in a pseudo-bet effect, both the lighting effect and the sound effect in the bet process effect are interrupted, and the effect switches to a bet-compatible effect, thereby imposing a restriction.

Figure 75 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, if a start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the execution of some of the effects in the bet process effect is restricted.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processing when a start operation is performed during the bet process effect differs from the processing in Figure 68 above. In this modified example, steps S3714, S3720, S3735, and S3738 have been added, and the other processing is the same as the corresponding processing in Figure 68.

That is, while waiting to light up the second bet display unit 34b, if it is determined in step S3733 that a pseudo bet permission flag or a start operation command has been received and it is determined in step S3734 that the wait period has elapsed, then in step S3735 a process is executed to set a limit flag in the various flags storage area 183a, and then the process returns to step S3712 and waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, a positive determination is made in step S3712, and the second bet display unit 34b is lighted up in step S3713. Then, in step S3714, it is determined whether the limit flag is set, and if it is not set, a process is executed to output a bet sound effect in step S3715, and then the process proceeds to the process of lighting up the third bet display unit 34c in step S3716. On the other hand, if the limit flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3716 without outputting a bet sound effect.

Furthermore, while waiting for the third bet display unit 34c to be lit, if it is determined in step S3736 that a pseudo bet permission flag or start operation command has been received and it is determined in step S3737 that the wait period has elapsed, then in step S3738 a process is executed to set a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process returns to step S3718 and waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, a positive determination is made in step S3718, and the third bet display unit 34c is lit in step S3719. Then, in step S3720, it is determined whether the above limit flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S3721 a process is executed to output a bet sound effect, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the limit flag is set, the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated without outputting a bet sound effect.

Figure 74 (b) shows how, if a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the above-mentioned pseudo betting presentation, the execution of some presentations in the betting process presentation is restricted.

Tb11 to tb16 are the same as tb1 to tb6 above. Let's assume that a bet is placed during the replay setting process following a specific replay win, and after the wait period has elapsed, a bet amount operation is performed at tb16. In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo-bet effect begins at tb16. If the start operation is performed at tb17, which is before tb18 when the bet process effect is completed, the lighting effects of the bet display units 34a to 34c continue, but the output of the accompanying bet sound effects is limited. As a result, for the bet process effect that began at tb16, the lighting effects are performed from tb16 to tb18, but the bet sound effects are performed from tb16 to tb17 and are no longer performed from tb17 to tb18. Then, at tb18, the effect switches to a bet-compatible effect. By doing this, it is possible to avoid overlapping of at least the processing for outputting bet sound effects with the processing for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is also possible to eliminate overlap between the bet sound effects and the start sound effects when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate.

For example, instead of or in addition to a configuration in which the lighting of each bet display unit 34a-34c is individually controlled, as in the bet display unit 34, a configuration is also possible in which the bet-responsive effects of the display control device 81 are performed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display unit 65. In such a configuration, if a bet amount operation is performed, the display effect pattern until the bet process effect is completed can be set when the bet process effect is started. In this case, it is believed that continuing the display effect pattern as is rather than switching to a bet-responsive effect display pattern midway because a bet amount operation is performed midway through the bet process effect will lead to a reduction in processing load. Therefore, by limiting at least the bet sound effect side midway, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load while also preventing inconveniences such as overlapping sound effects when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning.

Figure 76 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, if a start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the bet sound effect in the bet process effect continues, but the continuation of the lighting effect is limited.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, compared to the process in Figure 68 above, steps S3813, S3819, S3832, S3836, and S3839 have been added, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 68.

In other words, while waiting for the second bet display unit 34b to light up, if it is determined in step S3834 that a pseudo bet permission flag or start operation command has been received, and it is determined in step S3835 that the wait period has elapsed, a process is executed in step S3836 to set a restriction flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then processing proceeds to switch to the bet-compatible presentation on the step S3829 side.

Furthermore, while waiting for the third bet display unit 34c to be lit, if it is determined in step S3837 that a pseudo bet permission flag or start operation command has been received, and it is determined in step S3838 that the wait period has elapsed, a process is executed in step S3839 to set a restriction flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then processing proceeds to switch to the bet-compatible presentation on the step S3831 side.

In the process of switching to the bet-compatible effect, the bet display units 34a to 34c corresponding to the number of bets are turned on, and then in step S3832 it is determined whether the above-mentioned limit flag is set. If it is not set, the specific re-play bet effect setting process is terminated. If the limit flag is set, the process switches to the bet-compatible effect and then returns to step S3812.

If the bet timer reaches 0 in step S3812, an affirmative determination is made in step S3812, and a determination is made in step S3813 as to whether the above-mentioned restriction flag is set. If it is not set, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on in step S3814, a process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed in step S3815, and then the process proceeds to the process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c in step S3816. If the restriction flag is set in step S3813, the process of turning on the second bet display unit 34b is not executed, but a process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of turning on the third bet display unit 34c.

If the bet timer reaches 0 in step S3818, a positive determination is made in step S3818, and a determination is made in step S3819 as to whether the above-mentioned limit flag is set. If it is not set, the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in step S3820, and a process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed in step S3821, after which the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated. If the limit flag is set in step S3819, the process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed without turning on the third bet display unit 34c, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated.

Figure 74 (c) shows how the bet sound effect continues during the bet process presentation, while the continuation of the lighting presentation is limited.

Similar to tb1-tb6, assume that a bet is placed at tb21-tb25 in the replay setting process following a specific replay win, and after the wait period has elapsed, a bet amount operation is performed at tb26. In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo-bet effect begins at tb26. If the start operation is performed at tb27, before tb28, when the bet process effect is completed, the output of bet sound effects continues, but the illumination of the bet display units 34a-34c is suspended, and the bet display units 34a-34c corresponding to the bet are illuminated at tb27. As a result, the bet process effect that began at tb26 continues to output bet sound effects until tb28, but switches to a bet-related effect when the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins at tb27. By doing this, it is possible to prevent situations in which, even though the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun, the number of bets on the game for which that rotation has begun cannot be determined from the bet display unit 34.

Figure 77 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example, if a start operation is performed during the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the execution of the bet process effect is restricted, but the bet-related effect is started at the timing scheduled when the bet process effect was started.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, compared to the process in Figure 68 above, steps S3913, S3919, S3935, and S3938 have been added, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 68.

That is, while waiting for the second bet display unit 34b to be illuminated, if it is determined in step S3933 that a pseudo bet permission flag or a start operation command has been received and it is determined in step S3934 that the wait period has elapsed, then in step S3935 a process is executed to set a limit flag in the various flags storage area 183a, and then the process returns to step S3912 and waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, and in step S3913 a determination is made as to whether the above limit flag has been set. If it has not been set, in step S3914 the second bet display unit 34b is illuminated, and in step S3915 a process is executed to output a bet sound effect, and then the process proceeds to step S3916 and a process to determine whether the previous number of bets was 2. On the other hand, if the limit flag has been set in step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3916 without executing the processes of steps S3914 and S3915.

If the previous bet number is 3 instead of 2 in step S3916, processing is performed in step S3917 to wait until the third bet display unit 34c is turned on.

Furthermore, while waiting for the third bet display unit 34c to be lit, if it is determined in step S3936 that a pseudo bet permission flag or start operation command has been received and it is determined in step S3937 that the wait period has elapsed, a process is executed in step S3938 to set a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process returns to step S3918 and waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, a positive determination is made in step S3918, and it is determined in step S3919 whether the above limit flag has been set. If it has not been set, the third bet display unit 34c is lit in step S3920, a process is executed to output a bet sound effect in step S3921, and then the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3916 in the process of determining whether the previous bet number was 2, or if a limit flag is set in step S3919, the process proceeds to step S3929, where processing is performed to switch to a bet-compatible presentation.

Figure 74 (d) shows that although the execution of the above bet process effects is restricted, the bet-related effects are started at the timing scheduled when the bet process effects are started.

Similar to tb1-tb6, assume that a bet is placed in the replay setting process following a specific replay win at tb31-tb35, and after the wait period has elapsed, a bet amount operation is performed at tb36. In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo-bet effect is started at tb36. For example, assume that when the bet process effect starts, the bet process effect is set to complete at tb38, and the bet-related effect is set to start at tb38. If a start operation is performed at tb37, which is before tb38, the lighting effect and the output of bet sound effects are interrupted. However, the lighting effect does not switch to the bet-related effect at tb37, and the lighting effect remains in the state it was at tb37. Then, the lighting effect switches to the bet-related effect at tb38. Specifically, for example, if the first bet display unit 34a is lit but the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c are off at tb37, then from tb37 to tb38, only the first bet display unit 34a will remain lit, and at tb38, the bet display units 34a to 34c will switch to a lit state. By doing this, when restricting the bet process presentation midway, there is no need to change the planned execution (start) timing of the bet-related presentation, which simplifies processing.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, in the case where a start operation is performed during the betting process, the relationship between the push order notification effect set in the start-time effect setting process, the specific role notification effect, and the betting process effect will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 81. As already explained, in the start-time effect setting process, when a start operation is performed, the push order notification effect is executed before the wait period has elapsed, whereas the specific role notification effect is executed after the wait period has elapsed, when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Figure 78(a) shows the betting process presentation in the above embodiment.

When a start operation is performed at tc1, a lottery process is performed and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins. If the result of the lottery process is a specific replay result, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops at tc2, and the specific replay result is won. A bet is set in the replay setting process. If the wait period from the start of rotation at tc1 elapses at tc6, and a bet operation is performed at tc3, before the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect begins. If a start operation is performed at tc4, also before the wait period has elapsed, while the bet process effect is being executed, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc4 does not result in a push order notification effect or a specific combination result, the bet process effect continues without being interrupted at tc4. The bet process effect then ends at tc5, and switches to a bet-compatible effect. After that, at time tc6 when the wait period has elapsed, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to rotate.

Figure 79 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, in which the presence or absence of restrictions on the bet process effects is varied in relation to the push order notification effects.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, step S4022 has been added compared to the process in Figure 68 above, and the other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 68.

That is, if a start operation command is received in step S4020, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4021, and then in step S4022, based on the received start operation command, it is determined whether the result of this lottery process is a push order role win, a push order notification command has been received, and it corresponds to the execution of one of the push order notification effects (see steps S2101 to S2107). If none of the push order notification effects are executed, it is determined in step S4023 whether or not the waiting period has begun, and if it has, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in step S4031, and then the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet process effect on the step S4006 side. If it is not the waiting period in step S4023, the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet process effect on the step S4024 side.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4022 that one of the push order notification effects will be executed, the process proceeds to step S4024, where the bet-related effect is executed, without determining whether or not it is during the wait period in step S4023.

Figure 78 (b) shows the case where the push order notification effect is performed in the above modified example.

As with tc1 through tc3, bets are placed in the replay setting process following a specific replay win at tc11 through tc13. When a bet operation is performed at tc13, before the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect begins. Similarly, if a start operation is performed at tc14, before the wait period has elapsed and while the bet process effect is being executed, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc14 is that a push order notification effect will be executed, the push order notification effect will begin at tc14. In this case, in this modified example, even before the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect that was scheduled to be executed until tc15 is limited at tc14. This prevents the bet process effect from overlapping with the push order notification effect, preventing inconveniences due to overlapping effects and processes. Note that, in the figure, if the bet process effect is interrupted at tc14, it switches to a bet-compatible effect at tc14. The spin start process for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the start operation at tc14 occurs at tc16 when the wait period has elapsed.

Figure 78 (c) shows a case where a specific role notification effect is performed in the above modified example.

As with tc1 through tc3, bets are placed during the replay setting process associated with winning a specific replay result from tc21 through tc23. When a bet operation is performed at tc23, before the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect begins. Similarly, if a start operation is performed at tc24, before the wait period has elapsed and while the bet process effect is being executed, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc24 results in a specific role notification effect, the specific role notification effect is executed from tc26, when the wait period has elapsed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, rather than at t24. In this case, in this modified example, the bet process effect that was scheduled to run until tc25 is not limited at tc24 but continues until tc25. In this way, even for effects associated with a start operation, such as a specific role notification effect, by not limiting the bet process effect if it does not overlap with the bet process effect, it is possible to avoid unnecessary periods of non-execution of effects.

Figure 80 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, in which the push order notification effect is restricted in relation to the bet process effect.

In the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example, steps S4122 and S4123 have been added compared to the process in Figure 68 above, with the remaining processes being the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 68.

In other words, if a start operation command is received in step S4120, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4121, and then in step S4122, based on the received start operation command, it is determined whether or not the push order notification effect for the third replay will be executed as the start effect of this time (see steps S2101 to S2107). If no push order notification effect is executed, or if a push order notification effect is executed but it is a push order notification effect for the first to sixth minor roles or a push order notification effect for the second replay, it is determined in step S4124 whether or not the waiting period is in progress. If the waiting period is in progress, a pseudo bet permission flag is set in step S4132, and then the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet process effect in step S4106. If the waiting period is not in progress in step S4124, the process proceeds to the process of executing the bet process effect in step S4125.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4122 that the push order notification effect for the third replay should be executed, then in step S4123, a process is executed to set a push order delay flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process proceeds to step S4123, where it is determined whether or not the wait period is in progress.

In the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 52), steps S2104, S2106, and S2107 set the push order notification effect, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, step S4201 determines whether the push order delay flag is set. If the push order delay flag is not set, step S4202 executes the corresponding push order notification effect. On the other hand, if the push order delay flag is set, step S4203 determines whether the bet process effect has ended, and if the bet process effect has not ended, the process waits until it has ended. If the bet process effect has ended, step S4204 clears the push order delay flag, and then step S4202 executes the push order notification effect.

Figure 78 (d) shows how the push order notification effect is restricted.

As with tc1 to tc3, bets are placed in the replay setting process following a specific replay result win at tc31 to tc33, and when a bet operation is performed at tc33, before the wait period has elapsed, the bet process effect begins. Similarly, if a start operation is performed at tc34, before the wait period has elapsed and while the bet process effect is being executed, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t34 results in the execution of a push order notification effect for the third replay, this modified example restricts the execution of the push order notification effect. In other words, if the execution of a bet process effect and a specified push order notification effect overlap before the wait period has elapsed, the execution of the push order notification effect is restricted, and the push order notification effect begins at tc35, when the bet process effect started at tc34 ends. Note that t35 also occurs before the wait period has elapsed. This eliminates the overlap between the betting process effects and the push order notification effects, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the betting process effects switch to bet-related effects midway through. In the figure, the spin start process for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the start operation at tc34 is performed at tc36, when the wait period has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the push order notification effect based on the start operation of tc34 above is not the push order notification effect for the third replay, the push order notification effect will be executed as is, as in tc13 above, and the bet process effect will be restricted.

Here, the push order notification effect notifies the player of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The push order role is set so that the winning result differs depending on the order in which the push order is operated. Therefore, to encourage more careful operation, the push order notification effect is set to start based on the start operation even before the wait period has elapsed. In particular, when the push order bell is won, the winning result differs depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and the number of medals paid out when a win occurs differs depending on the result. Therefore, by restricting the betting process effect side of the push order notification effect when the push order bell is won, it is possible to ensure the player's profits in an optimal manner.

On the other hand, for normal replays A to C, although the winning replay result differs depending on the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44, the player's profit will not change regardless of which replay result wins. Therefore, if the push order notification effect and the bet process effect overlap when normal replays A to C are won, the push order notification effect is limited, making it possible to eliminate the overlap between the two effects to the extent that the player is not disadvantaged.

Furthermore, when normal rep A to C are won, the push order notification effects for the second replay are restricted when the push order notification effects for the second replay overlap with the betting process effects, while the push order notification effects are restricted when the push order notification effects for the third replay overlap with the betting process effects. The push order notification effects for the second replay are executed at the start of the first AT mode, and the push order notification effects for the third replay are executed at the start of the second AT mode. By restricting the push order notification effects for the third replay, the player can detect that the second AT mode is about to begin before the push order notification for the third replay. This creates a novel gameplay experience in which the type of AT mode can be determined in advance by restricting the push order notification effects due to overlap with the betting process effects.

Although not shown in the figure, even if the above-mentioned push order notification effect is restricted, the push order notification on the main control device 101 side will start at the timing of operation of the start lever 41. In this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who want to know the operation order earlier.

In addition, when the push order notification effect for the third replay and the betting process effect overlap, the push order notification effect is always restricted, but it may also be restricted at a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. In addition, when the push order notification effect for the second replay and the betting process effect overlap, the push order notification effect is always restricted, but it may also be restricted at a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. In these cases, by having the rate at which the push order notification effect for the second replay is restricted differ from the rate at which the push order notification effect for the third replay is restricted, it is possible to predict which AT mode will be initiated, and by making the rate at which the push order notification effect for the third replay, which initiates the advantageous AT mode, is restricted higher, new gameplay can be created, such as encouraging the player to desire the push order notification effect to be restricted in relation to the betting process effect. Additionally, the above ratio may be determined by the selection rate determined by the AT type determination process, and by restricting the push order notification effects for AT modes that are more likely to be selected, there will be fewer situations in which the betting process effects are restricted, making it less likely that the discomfort caused by the betting process effects being restricted will be felt.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, when a start operation is performed during a betting process presentation, reel presentations using the operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and modified examples of the relationship between the reels and the betting process presentation will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. The reel presentations are selected by a freeze presentation process in the presentation process (Figure 19) and are presented in the spin presentation process (step S401) in the reel control process (Figure 22). Here, the reel presentations will be described as follows: a first freeze presentation in which, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate while the stop switches 42 to 44 are disabled, and a second freeze presentation in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) before starting spinning. In other words, the first freeze effect is a reel effect that uses an operating mode that rotates each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the second freeze effect is a reel effect that uses an operating mode that does not rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 82 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, steps S4322, S4333, and S4336 have been added compared to the process in Figure 68 above, with the remaining processes being the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 68.

That is, in step S4320, it is determined that a start operation command has been received, and in step S4321, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Then, in step S4322, it is determined based on the received start operation command whether a first freeze command has been received, indicating that the result of the current freeze lottery process execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect. If the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4323, where it is determined whether or not the wait period is in progress. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4324, where a bet-compatible effect is performed, without determining whether or not the wait period is in progress in step S4323.

Furthermore, if a start operation command is received during the waiting state until the second bet display unit 34b or the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in the bet process presentation (if a positive judgment is made in step S4332 or step S4335), steps S4333 and S4336 determine whether a first freeze command has been received as the received start operation command. When the first freeze presentation is to be performed, the process proceeds directly to switching to the bet presentation without performing the process of determining whether or not the wait period is in progress (step S4334 or step S4337). On the other hand, if the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to determining whether or not the wait period is in progress.

Figure 83(a) shows a case where a bet number operation is performed at td1, the bet process presentation is performed up to td2, the spinning of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is initiated based on the start operation performed at td3, and the result of the lottery process based on that start operation is a specific replay result. At td4, a specific replay result win is achieved and the replay state is set, and after the wait period has elapsed at td5, a bet number operation is performed at td6, and the bet process presentation in the pseudo bet presentation begins. Then, at td7, before td8 when the bet process presentation is completed, the start operation is performed, and the lottery process based on that start operation determines that the above-mentioned first freeze presentation will be performed.

In this case, although the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins from td7, the start of rotation based on the rotation start process (step S402) in the reel control process (Figure 22) does not begin until td9, when the first freeze effect ends. In other words, normally, start drive control is performed based on the start operation to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and bring it to constant speed rotation, and assuming a configuration in which the stop switches 42-44 can then be operated, when a reel effect is to be performed, specific drive control for that reel effect is performed before the start drive control. From td7 to td9, first specific drive control is performed as specific drive control for the first freeze effect involving the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and start drive control is performed from td9.

In this case, the bet process presentation that began at td6 will not overlap with the start drive control based on the start operation at td7. However, in this case, the first specific drive control in the first freeze presentation is performed from td7, and since this first specific drive control and the bet process presentation overlap, the bet process presentation is interrupted at td7. This prevents inconvenience caused by overlapping drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with the bet process presentation. Note that in the figure, if the bet process presentation is interrupted at td7, it is switched to the bet-compatible presentation at td7.

Figure 83(b) shows the second freeze effect.

Td11 to td16 are the same as td1 to td6, and the bet process effect in the simulated bet effect is initiated based on the bet number operation on td16. Assume that the start operation is performed on td17, before td18, when the bet process effect is completed, and the lottery process based on that start operation determines that the second freeze effect described above will be performed.

As described above, when a reel effect is performed at the start of rotation, specific drive control for that reel effect is performed before the start drive control, but from td17 to td19, second specific drive control is performed as specific drive control for the second freeze effect, and start drive control is performed from td19. Therefore, in this modified example, the bet process effect that started from td16 is not interrupted at td17, but is executed until td18 and then switched to a bet-compatible effect. In other words, from td17 to td18, the bet process effect and the second specific drive control for the second freeze effect overlap. As described above, the second specific drive control is a drive control that does not involve rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so this overlap is unlikely to result in an extreme increase in processing load. Furthermore, because the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not actually started to spin, it is possible to avoid giving the player the feeling of discomfort that the betting process presentation has been interrupted midway, even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not yet started to spin.

We will now explain a modified example of the freeze effect lottery. Figure 84 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (Figure 19).

In step S4401, a freeze execution lottery is conducted. The freeze lottery is set so that, for example, if the lottery result for this game is one that is likely to result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery (a specific combination), the chance of winning the freeze lottery is higher than if the lottery result is one that is unlikely to result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery (for example, normal reps A to C). The probability of winning may also vary depending on the type of freeze effect being executed. Then, in step S4402, a determination is made as to whether the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of a first freeze effect. If the first freeze effect is to be executed, a first freeze flag is set in step S4403, and a process is executed in step S4404 to set a first freeze command as an output target to the display control device 81, after which the freeze lottery process ends. If the first freeze flag is set, the spin effect process of the reel control process is controlled to execute the first freeze effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4402, a judgment is made in step S4405 as to whether the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of a second freeze effect. If the second freeze effect is to be executed, a second freeze flag is set in step S4406, and a process is executed in step S4407 to set the second freeze command as an output target to the display control device 81, after which the freeze lottery process is terminated. If the second freeze flag is set, the spin effect process of the reel control process is controlled to execute a second freeze effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4405, a judgment is made in step S4408 as to whether the specific replay flag is set and whether the current start operation occurred within a predetermined period (0.4 seconds) after any bet operation was made. If a positive judgment is made in step S4408, the process proceeds to step S4406, where processing is performed to execute the second freeze effect. In other words, if the specific replay flag is set and the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the second freeze effect will be executed even if the result of the freeze execution lottery does not correspond to the execution of the second freeze effect.

Figure 83 (c) shows the case where the freeze lottery result corresponds to the execution of the second freeze effect, where td21 to td26 are the same as td1 to td6 above, and the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is initiated based on the bet amount operation on td26. If the start operation is performed on td28, which is after td27 when the bet process effect is completed, and the second freeze effect is won, the second specific drive control for the second freeze effect is performed from td28 to td29, and then the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins (start drive control is performed).

Figure 83(d) shows a case where the freeze lottery result did not correspond to the execution of the second freeze effect, and the start operation was performed on td37, which is before td38, when the betting process effect started on td36 is completed. Note that td31 to td36 are the same as td1 to td6 described above. In this case, in this modified example, even if the second freeze effect is not won, the second freeze effect is executed, and the betting process effect is not interrupted midway through, but is continued until td38. In this way, by intentionally executing the second freeze effect when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, it is possible to reduce the number of times the betting process effect is interrupted midway and to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by an interruption midway. Note that the second freeze effect started on td37 is executed until td39, and from td39, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins (start drive control is performed).

<Modification 4>
In this modification, in the replay state set based on the winning of a specific replay result, the manner of the pseudo bet presentation is changed according to the type of bet number operation executed.

Figure 85(a) shows the pseudo-bet presentation according to the type of bet operation in the above embodiment.

In a game in which the specific number of coins is set to three, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at te1, a bet process effect is executed in the normal bet effect, in which the first bet indicator 34a, the second bet indicator 34b, and the third bet indicator 34c are sequentially lit, and at te2, the effect switches to a bet-related effect. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b switches from an lit state to an unlit state at te1. If a start operation is performed at te3 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, and the result of the lottery process based on this start operation is a specific replay result, at te4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, and a specific replay result win is established, and a bet corresponding to the specific number of coins (3) is placed in the replay setting process.

If, at time te5 in this replay state, a bet operation is performed in which medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 rather than the first credit insertion switch 56, a specific insertion command is output from the main control device 101 as described above, and a pseudo-bet effect based on the specific insertion command is executed. That is, a bet process effect is executed in which the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet display unit 34c are sequentially lit, and at time te6, the effect switches to a bet-related effect. Also, at time te5, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In other words, in the above embodiment, in the replay state based on a winning specific replay result, not only when a bet operation is performed using the first credit insertion switch 56, but also when a bet operation such as inserting one medal through the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, a bet process effect corresponding to three medals, the same number as the number bet in the lottery that resulted in the specific replay result, is executed.

Note that te5 shows a case where a bet operation is performed by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45, but even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated to operate a bet corresponding to a bet of one coin, the pseudo bet presentation based on the output of the specific second operation command will produce a bet process presentation corresponding to a bet of three coins, which is the same number of coins bet in the lottery that resulted in the specific replay.

Incidentally, even if a medal is inserted through the medal slot 45 after the bet process effect has been performed, the bet process effect will not be executed, and no bet sound effect will be output; only the credit counter will be incremented and a credit increase sound effect will be output. In contrast, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated after the bet process effect has been performed, no bet sound effect will be output and the credit counter will not be incremented.

Figure 86 shows a modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process. In this modified example of the specific replay bet effect setting process, steps S4505 and S4506 have been added compared to the process in Figure 68 above.

That is, if it is determined in step S4504 that a specific input command, a specific first operation command, or a specific second operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether the received command is a specific input command or a specific second operation command. If it is a specific first command, the process proceeds to step S4507, where processing is executed to perform a bet process presentation. On the other hand, if it is a specific input command or a specific second operation command, the process executes a single bet presentation setting process in step S4506, and then terminates this specific replay bet presentation setting process. The single bet presentation setting process in step S4506 is as shown in FIG. 64. However, in this case, the single bet presentation setting process does not perform the processing of setting the light-out flag in step S3002.

Figure 85 (b) shows a case where, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, a bet operation corresponding to a single bet operation, such as inserting a medal through the second credit insertion switch 57 or medal insertion slot 45, is performed.

As with te1 through te4, when a replay state is set based on a specific replay win at te11 through te14, if one medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 at te15, a bet process effect is played in which the first bet display unit 34a is illuminated along with a bet sound effect, followed by a bet-response effect indicating that one bet has been made at te16. Furthermore, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te17, a bet process effect is played in which the second bet display unit 34b is illuminated along with a bet sound effect, followed by a bet-response effect indicating that two bets have been made at te18. Furthermore, if one medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 at te19, a bet process effect is played in which the third bet display unit 34c is illuminated along with a bet sound effect, followed by a bet-response effect indicating that three bets have been made at te20. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b remains illuminated until te19. In other words, the pseudo-bet presentation is configured to produce a presentation equivalent to a single bet presentation. This makes it possible to make the pseudo-bet presentation similar to the presentation when an actual bet is made (single bet presentation), which helps to give the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other small winning results or losing results.

Figure 85(c) shows the case where a start operation is performed midway through a configuration in which a single bet presentation is performed in a pseudo bet presentation as shown in Figure 85(b) above.

At te21 through te28, similar to te11 through te18, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, pseudo-bet effects corresponding to a one-coin bet are executed at te25 through te28, and the first bet indicator 34a and the second bet indicator 34b are illuminated, indicating a bet-compatible state corresponding to a two-coin bet. In this situation, if a start operation is performed at te29 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin, the execution of the bet process effects is restricted at te29; only the third bet indicator 34c is illuminated, and no bet sound effects are output. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin to spin in a state in which a bet-compatible effect corresponding to a three-coin bet is executed. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is switched off at te29, when the start operation is performed.

Figure 85 (d) shows an example in which a bet-responsive effect corresponding to a single bet operation, such as inserting a medal through the second credit insertion switch 57 or medal insertion slot 45, is also executed in the pseudo bet effect, but the manner in which it is executed is restricted. A detailed explanation of the specific replay bet effect setting process in this case will be omitted, but in Figure 86 above, if it is determined in step S4505 that a specific insertion command or specific second operation command has been received, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, and then the bet sound effect is output in step S3005 in the single bet effect setting process (Figure 69), after which the specific replay bet effect setting process is terminated.

te31 to te34 are similar to te1 to te4 and are set to a replay state based on a specific replay result win. When one medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 at te35, the execution of the bet process effect is limited and switched to a bet-related effect. The first credit lamp 56b is switched off at te35. In this case, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te36 or a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 at te37, the bet process effect is not executed. However, bet sound effects are output in response to each single bet operation at te35, te36, and te37. In other words, the execution mode is limited so that only the bet sound effects of the bet process effect are executed for each single bet operation at te35, te36, and te37. By outputting bet sound effects in this way, the processing configuration can be simplified and the player can clearly understand that each bet operation has been accepted. In this case too, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 at time te38 after three bet sound effects have been output, the bet process presentation is not executed, and no bet sound effects are output, and only the credit counter is incremented. Also, in this case too, the credit increase sound effect may be output when the credit counter is incremented.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the provisional standby state and standby state are set even in the replay state. Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the standby state setting process in this modified example.

The standby state setting process in this modified example differs from the process in Figure 71 in that the standby counter is allowed to count even in the replay state; other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in Figure 71.

That is, if it is determined in step S4601 that no gaming operation is being performed, it is determined in step S4602 whether the reels are spinning, and it is determined in step S4603 whether medals are being paid out. If the reels are not spinning and medals are not being paid out, processing is executed in step S4603 to allow the standby counter to count. If the reels are spinning or medals are being paid out, processing is executed in step S4605 to disallow the standby counter to count.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the standby processing in this modified example. Compared to the processing in Figure 72, the standby processing in this modified example adds steps S4702, S4704, S4714, S4716, and steps S4719 to S4722, but the other processing is the same as the corresponding processing in Figure 72 above.

In other words, if the game ends in step S4713, a determination is made in step S4714 as to whether a specific re-play result win has occurred. If the game result is anything other than a specific re-play result win, processing is executed in step S4715 to start counting the display continuation counter. If the specific re-play result win has occurred, processing is executed in step S4716 to set a specific re-play state flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then processing proceeds to step S4715 to start counting the display continuation counter.

Furthermore, if the display continuation counter reaches 30 seconds, which corresponds to the first transition period, without any gaming operations being performed in step S4717 (step S4718: YES), step S4719 determines whether the specific re-play state flag is set. If it is not set, processing for the temporary standby state is executed in steps S4720 and S4721. The processing in steps S4720 and S4721 is the same as the processing in steps S3616 and S3617 above, and is processing in which the bet display unit 34 and first credit lamp 56b are turned off.

On the other hand, if the first transition period has elapsed after a specific re-play result has been won (step S4719: YES), processing is executed in step S4722 to turn off the bet display unit 34, and processing is executed in step S4723 to turn on and off the first credit lamp 56b, after which the standby processing is terminated. In other words, the provisional standby state after a specific re-play result has a different notification pattern from the provisional standby state after other results, in terms of the first credit lamp 56b.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4701 that the second transition period to the standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step S4702 whether the specific re-play state flag is set. If it is not set, steps S4703 to S4707 are executed to place the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, bet display unit 34, and first credit lamp 56b in standby mode. The processing in steps S4703 to S4707 is the same as the processing in steps S3602 to S3605.

On the other hand, if the second transition period has elapsed after the specific re-play result has been won (step S4702: YES), in step S4704 the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display text such as "Big chance occurring!!" to notify that the specific re-play result has been won. Then, in steps S4705 to S4707, the speaker 64, bet display unit 34, and first credit lamp 56b are placed in standby mode.

Figure 89 is a timing chart showing the provisional standby state and standby state in this modified example.

As shown in Figure 89 (a1), if the game started at tf1 results in a normal replay result win, and a normal replay result win is achieved at tf2, the game will be set to a temporary standby state at tf3, when the first transition period (TA) has passed since tf2. In this case, the bet display unit 34 will be turned off. Incidentally, since the normal replay result win has occurred, the first credit lamp 56b will remain off. Thereafter, at tf4, when the second transition period (TB) has passed since tf2, the game will be set to a standby state. In this case, the BET display unit 75 will be turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 will also be set to standby mode (Figure 89 (a2)).

As shown in Figure 89 (b1), if a game started at tf11 results in a small win and ends at tf12, the game will be set to a temporary standby state at tf13, when the first transition period (TA) has passed from tf12. In this case, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b will be turned off. Then, at tf14, when the second transition period (TB) has passed from tf12, the game will be set to a standby state. In this case, the BET display unit 75 will be turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 will also be set to standby mode (Figure 89 (b2)).

As shown in Figure 89 (c1), if the game started at tf21 results in a specific replay result win, and the specific replay result win is realized at tf22, the system will be set to a temporary standby state at tf23, when the first transition period (TA) has passed from tf22. In this case, the bet display unit 34 will be turned off, and the first credit lamp 56b will be flashing. Thereafter, at tf24, when the second transition period (TB) has passed from tf22, the system will be set to a standby state. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b and the BET display unit 75 will be turned off, and the auxiliary display unit 65 will also be set to standby mode. However, the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65 is different from that shown in Figures 89 (a2) and 89 (b2) (Figure 89 (c2)).

As described above, after a game that resulted in a specific replay result or a small win result, etc., ends, the first credit lamp 56b remains lit. However, in this modified example, when the first transition period has elapsed and the game enters a temporary standby state, the lamp remains unlit after a small win result, etc., but flashes after the specific replay result is entered. Therefore, while it is not possible to distinguish between a specific replay result and a small win result, etc., from the notification mode of the first credit lamp 56b before the transition to the temporary standby state, it becomes possible to distinguish after the transition to the temporary standby state.

Regardless of the outcome, the bet display unit 34 turns off when the slot machine 10 enters a provisional standby state. The bet display unit 34 is located on the gaming panel 25, which faces the front of the slot machine 10. The first credit lamp 56b is located below the gaming panel 25 and is built into the first credit insertion switch 56, which protrudes upward from the operation surface that intersects with the gaming panel 25 (see Figures 1 and 2). In this case, when viewing the slot machine 10 from a distance, such as from the edge of an island where multiple gaming machines are lined up, it is possible to see whether the bet display unit 34 is lit, but it is impossible or more difficult to see whether the first credit lamp 56b is lit than the bet display unit 34. Therefore, if you want to check whether the first credit lamp 56b is lit (flashing) as described above, you may need to get close to the slot machine 10 to check. In this way, by making it difficult to check the state of the slot machine 10 at a glance, even if it is not in the desired state, it can motivate players to try playing since they have come so close, making it possible to improve the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

Furthermore, when the slot machine 10 transitions to standby mode, the first credit lamp 56b and bet display unit 34 remain off regardless of the outcome, but the display mode of the auxiliary display unit 65 changes only after a specific replay result is won. This makes it possible to prevent the slot machine 10 from being left unattended in a situation where a specific replay result has been won and there is a good chance of winning the AT mode transition lottery, etc.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a notification will be described when credits are settled by operating the settlement switch 59. Fig. 90 is a flowchart showing the medal return process in this modified example. The medal return process is the process executed in step S206 in the normal process (Fig. 18).

In step S4801, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if not, the medal return process is terminated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether the specific re-play flag was set in the previous BET process and whether the game is in a re-play state based on a specific re-play result win. If the specific re-play flag has not been set, in step S4803, a process is executed to set the settlement command as an output target to the display control device 81.

In the following step S4804, it is determined whether any replay flags are set. If none of the replay flags are set and the game is not in a replay state, in step S4805 the hopper device 51 is controlled to pay out a number of medals equivalent to the total number of the BET counter and the credit counter. Then, in step S4806, the BET counter and the credit counter are cleared to 0, and the medal return process is terminated.

If any of the replay flags is set in step S4804 and the game is in a replay state, the hopper device 51 is controlled in step S4807 to dispense a number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter. Then, in step S4808, the credit counter is cleared to 0, and the medal return process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, credits can be cleared even in the re-play state. In states other than the re-play state, medals are paid out, including the virtual medals bet. In the re-play state, medals are paid out excluding the virtual medals bet. Therefore, in the re-play state, credits can be cleared by operating the clearing switch 59, but even after the clearing, it remains possible to play at least one game without needing new medals. This configuration resolves the issue of players being unable to end play due to consecutive re-play wins when the end of play is imminent, such as when the amusement hall closes, while still clearly distinguishing between re-play results and minor winning results. This makes it possible to end play even if it means giving up the right to play one game, meeting the diverse needs of players.

However, among the replay states, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, not only is there the right to play one game, but as mentioned above, there is a high possibility of winning an AT mode based on a specific winning combination, and ending play as is is likely to result in a significant loss for the player. Therefore, if it is determined in step S4802 that the specific replay flag is set, in step S4809, it is determined whether a third transition period has elapsed since the specific replay flag was set, for example, using a timer counter that begins measuring after the specific replay flag is set. In this modified example, the third transition period is set to 20 seconds, which is shorter than the second transition period set to the standby state and shorter than the first transition period set to the provisional standby state. If the third transition period has not elapsed, the medal return process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, credits cannot be settled even if the settlement switch 59 is operated until the third transition period has elapsed since the replay state was established based on a specific replay result win.

If the third transition period has elapsed in step S4809, the process of incrementing the settlement operation counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1 is executed in step S4810, and it is determined in step S4811 whether the settlement operation counter has reached the specific number of 2. If it has not reached 2, that is, if this is the first settlement operation even after the third transition period has elapsed, the medal return process is terminated.

In other words, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, even if the settlement switch 59 is operated, credit settlement may be restricted. This makes it possible to effectively prevent abandonment of an AT mode win based on a specific replay result win.

If the liquidation operation counter reaches a specific number in step S4811, the liquidation operation counter is cleared in step S4812, and then a process is executed in step S4813 to set a specific liquidation command as an output target to the display control device 81. Thereafter, processing for liquidating credits is executed in steps S4804 to S4808. In other words, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, the system is set up so that credits can be liquidated by performing a specific number of liquidation operations.

The return effect processing on the display control device 81 side will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 91. The return effect processing is performed as part of the other processing (step S2011) in the effect setting processing (Figure 51).

In step S4901, it is determined whether either the settlement command or the specific settlement command has been received, and if not, the return performance processing ends. If either command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, the return period counter provided in the various counter area 183b begins to count down. The return period counter is a counter that the CPU 181 uses to keep track of the duration of the sound effect at the time of payment (return sound effect), and is initially set to 5000. The return period counter is decremented by 1 every 2 seconds, and reaches 0 in 10 seconds.

Next, in step S4903, it is determined whether a specific settlement command has been received. If it is a settlement command rather than a specific settlement command, in step S4904, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a return sound effect. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether the return period counter has reached 0, and the process waits until it reaches 0. If it has reached 0, in step S4906, the output of the return sound effect is stopped, and the return performance process ends. The return sound effect is set to, for example, an announcement such as "Ding dong, payment completed" that is repeated over a predetermined period of time. Note that the return sound effect is preferably played at a high volume (maximum volume), which makes it easier for the amusement hall manager to distinguish between fraudulent attempts to operate the hopper device 51 and legitimate settlement operations.

If a specific settlement command is received in step S4903, proceed to step S4907. The processing of steps S49047 and S4921 is the same as the processing of steps S3405 to S3419 in the specific re-play bet effect setting process (Figure 68) described above. In other words, the processing of steps S4907 to S4921 results in the execution of a bet process effect in the pseudo-bet effect.

Then, in step S4921, the bet process presentation is completed, and the presentation switches to the bet-compatible presentation in the replay state based on the specific replay result win. Then, in step S4904, processing is executed to output the above-mentioned return sound effect, and the return presentation processing ends.

The process of credit settlement will be explained with reference to the timing chart in Figure 92.

Figure 92(a) shows how settlement is carried out after the results of minor winnings, etc.

That is, suppose a bet operation is performed at tg1, the bet process presentation is completed at tg2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning at tg3, and stop at tg4. The result of the lottery process at tg2 is a small win result. In this case, if the settlement switch 59 is operated at tg5, medals are paid out until tg6. Here, because the credit counter becomes 0 after the settlement as described above, the first credit lamp 56 is also turned off at tg5. The predetermined period during which the above-mentioned return sound effect is played is set to a period longer than the total number of medals paid out (53) equal to the maximum number of the credit counter and the maximum number of the bet counter. The return sound effect continues until tg7, which is after tg6 when the medal return is completed. Incidentally, in this modified example, the length of the return sound effect is set to a uniform predetermined period (TC, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of medals returned, thereby making it possible to reduce storage capacity.

Figure 92(b) shows how settlement is carried out after a specific replay result is won.

In other words, the game is completed at tg11-tg14, just like tg1-tg4, and replay setting processing is performed at tg14 based on a specific replay result win. Even if the settlement switch 59 is operated at t15, after the third transition period has elapsed, settlement is not performed because the settlement operation counter is 1. At tg16, the settlement switch 59 is operated again, setting the settlement operation counter to 2 and starting settlement. However, the output of the return sound effect does not begin at tg16. Instead, a betting process presentation is performed from tg16 to tg17, and the presentation switches to a betting-related presentation at tg17. When the betting process presentation is completed at tg17, the output of the settlement sound effect begins at tg17, and the output of the settlement sound effect continues until tg19. The return of the medals is completed at tg18.

In this modified example, the length of the settlement sound effect when a specific settlement command is received is the above-mentioned predetermined period minus the length of the bet process presentation. This makes it possible to prevent the settlement sound effect based on the specific settlement command from continuing unnecessarily for an extended period of time even after the medal return has been completed, causing inconvenience or discomfort.

After the output of the settlement sound effect has finished at tg19, if a start operation is performed at tg20 without operating the bet amount, since a bet has been placed in the replay state as described above, it is possible to start the game corresponding to that bet.

In this way, in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, settlement may be restricted even if the settlement switch 59 is operated, which effectively prevents the player from ending play without realizing that the specific replay result win has occurred.

In addition, even in a replay state based on a specific replay win, settlement is possible by operating the settlement switch 59 a specific number of times, making it possible to meet the needs of players who, despite knowing this, still wish to end their game.

However, it is thought that some players may be in a hurry to finish their game and may not realize that they have won a specific replay result, but may instead repeatedly press the settlement switch 59 to settle their bets. Therefore, as described above, while settlement is possible by operating the settlement switch 59, in such cases a pseudo-bet effect is implemented. This is expected to make even players who settle their bets without realizing that they have won a specific replay result realize it, making it less likely that a player will suffer a disadvantage.

In addition, the pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59 is set so as not to overlap with the settlement sound effect. This makes it easier to notice that the pseudo-bet effect is being performed, and makes it more difficult for players to give up the benefits of winning a specific replay result.

The configuration to prevent the above-mentioned settlement sound effect and the pseudo-bet effect from overlapping may be modified as follows:

Figure 92 (c) shows how, when settlement is performed in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, the settlement sound effect is output first, and the pseudo-bet presentation is executed later.

In other words, similar to tg11-tg14, a replay state is set based on a specific replay result win at tg21-tg24, and credits are settled by operating the settlement switch 59 at tg25 and tg26. In this case, the medals are returned from tg26, and the output of return sound effects begins at tg26. Then, when the medal return is completed at tg27, a pseudo bet presentation begins at tg27. This pseudo bet presentation continues until tg29. In other words, the period from tg26 to tg28 is the output period for return sound effects, and from tg27 to tg28, the bet process presentation takes priority, and the output of return sound effects is limited.

In this case, when settlement begins, the output of the return sound effect begins, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at tg27, when the pseudo-bet effect begins. Therefore, even though settlement has begun, the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, making it easier to notice that a specific re-play result has been won.

As mentioned above, even if settlement is made in a replay state based on a specific replay result win, the game can be played without requiring a new bet because it is in a replay state. In Figure 92(d), the timing at which the game starts after settlement is made is different from that in Figure 92(b) above.

That is, tg31 to tg38 are the same as tg11 to tg18 above, and indicate that the medal return that began at tg36 is completed at tg38. Furthermore, a pseudo-bet effect is performed from tg36, and a return sound effect is output from tg37. In such a situation, if the start operation is performed at tg39, which is before tg40 when the return sound effect was scheduled to end, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin at tg39. Therefore, in such a situation, it is advisable to end the return sound effect at tg39. This makes it possible to avoid overlapping the effects and processing at the start of spin with the return sound effect and associated processing.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the manner of the pseudo bet effect is changed. Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example.

The specific replay bet presentation setting process in this modified example differs from the process in Figure 68 in that the bet interval in the bet process presentation based on the bet amount operation and that the bet process presentation is also performed when a bet-related presentation is performed based on a start operation; other processing is the same as the corresponding processing in Figure 68.

In other words, in this modified example, the process of setting the bet interval in the bet process presentation based on the bet amount operation (steps S5011 and S5016) sets it to approximately 0.2 seconds, which is longer than the interval in the above embodiment (approximately 0.1 seconds). In other words, the interval between bets in the bet process presentation of the pseudo bet presentation in this modified example is the same interval as the interval between bets in the bet process presentation of the replay bet presentation executed based on a normal replay win, and the bet process presentation of the pseudo bet presentation shares a notification mode with the bet process presentation of the replay bet presentation.

Furthermore, in this modified example, if it is determined in step S5020 that a start operation command has been received, the first credit lamp 56b and all bet display units 34a to 34c are turned off (steps S5021 and S5023), and then in step S5025, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on. In this modified example, in step S5026, a bet sound effect is output.

Then, in step S5027, it is determined whether the previous bet number was 1. If it was not 1, the process proceeds to step S5028, where 67, which corresponds to approximately 0.1 seconds, is input into the bet timer, and in step S5029, the process waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, a positive determination is made in step S5029, and in step S5030, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step S5031, a bet sound effect is output.

In the following step S5032, it is determined whether the previous bet number was 2. If it was not 2, the process proceeds to step S5033, where 67, which corresponds to approximately 0.1 seconds, is input into the bet timer, and in step S5034 the process waits until the bet timer reaches 0. If the bet timer reaches 0, a positive determination is made in step S5034, and in step S5035 the third bet display unit 34c is turned on, and in step S5036 a bet sound effect is output, after which the specific replay bet effect setting process ends. Note that if a negative determination is made in step S5027 or step S5032, the specific replay bet effect setting process ends immediately.

In other words, in this modified example, if a bet number operation is performed in a re-play state based on a specific re-play result win, a bet process effect with a notification pattern common to the bet process effect in the re-play bet effect is executed, and then the effect switches to a bet-compatible effect. On the other hand, if a start operation is performed in the re-play state without a bet number operation, a bet process effect with a notification pattern common to the bet process effect in the consecutive bet effect is executed, and then the effect switches to a bet-compatible effect. As described above, the bet process effect in the consecutive bet effect is set to take a shorter time to complete than the bet process effect in the re-play bet effect. Therefore, by doing so, if a start operation is performed in a re-play state based on a specific re-play result win without a bet number operation, it is possible to end the bet process effect and switch to a bet-compatible effect earlier than the pseudo-bet effect based on a bet number operation, thereby reducing overlap between the spinning of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the bet process effect.

Furthermore, as already explained, in the specific replay bet effect setting process, even if the start operation is performed without a bet amount operation, an effect similar to a pseudo bet effect based on a bet amount operation is performed as long as the wait period has not elapsed (step S5022: YES). In other words, in this modified example, when the start operation is performed without a bet amount operation, the notification mode of the bet process effect is different before and after the wait period has elapsed. In this way, it is possible to effectively match the bet effect to the progress of the game, such as whether or not each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started to spin.

In this case, as in the above variant, by having both notification modes switch to the bet-compatible mode via the bet process mode, it is possible to minimize the differences between the two notification modes, and it is possible to match the bet mode to the game's progress without causing the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, both notification modes are used for other bet effects, and the notification mode before the wait period has elapsed is common to the notification mode for the replay bet effect, while the notification mode after the wait period has elapsed is common to the notification mode for the consecutive bet effect. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated notification mode when changing the notification mode for the bet effect according to the progress of the game, making it possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In particular, because the only difference between the two notification modes is the interval at which the bet display units 34a-34c are lit, it is possible to change the notification mode for the bet presentation simply by adjusting this interval. This makes it possible to match the bet presentation with the progress of the game with an extremely simple configuration.

Furthermore, since this only involves adjusting the interval between bets, if the wait period elapses during a bet process presentation, switching to the bet presentation for which the wait period has elapsed will only result in a discrepancy in the interval, which is expected to have the effect of completing the bet process presentation early while reducing the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. The following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them to the above-described embodiments and modifications. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be achieved) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them.

(1) While the above explanation assumes that the replay setting process is executed as part of the bet processing at the start of a game, the replay setting process may also be configured to be executed if a replay result win is achieved at the end of a game. More specifically, the replay setting process may be configured to be executed if a replay result win is achieved in the payout determination process (step S413) in the reel control process (FIG. 22). Furthermore, the replay setting process may also be configured to be executed in the medal payout process (step S214) in the normal processing (FIG. 18).

(2) When a normal replay result win is achieved, the BET display units 75 are configured to light up sequentially, and when a specific replay result win is achieved, the BET display units 75 are simultaneously configured to light up. However, this configuration may be modified. That is, even when a specific replay result win is achieved, the BET display units 75 may be configured to light up sequentially. In this case, the intervals at which the BET display units 75a to 75c are lit may be the same or approximately the same for normal replay results and specific replay results, or may be different intervals. However, to prevent situations in which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not begin when a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation in a pseudo bet presentation based on a specific replay result win, it is preferable that the interval at which the BET display units 75a-75c are lit based on a specific replay result win be shorter than in the case of a normal replay result. For example, the interval may be the same or approximately the same as the interval at which the BET display units 75a-75c are lit in the first operation response process, or it may be shorter than the interval at which the BET display units 75a-75c are lit in the first operation response process.

(3) In the above configuration, a replay other than the first replay is considered a specific replay result, and when the specific replay result wins, the first credit lamp 56b is illuminated and a pseudo bet effect is displayed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. However, the first credit lamp 56b may be illuminated or a pseudo bet effect may be displayed after other results are achieved. For example, even after a normal replay result wins as the first replay, the first credit lamp 56b may be illuminated (blinked) if a predetermined condition is met, and a pseudo bet effect may be displayed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. Furthermore, even if a predetermined small win result or a losing result is achieved, the first credit lamp 56b may be illuminated and a pseudo bet effect may be displayed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, etc., if a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition may be, for example, when a certain game state transition occurs or when a predetermined effect is set as a bet effect or a start effect. Furthermore, when the first credit lamp 56b is lit or a pseudo-bet effect is performed as a result of a normal replay, it is preferable to complete the automatic virtual medal insertion process early, just as with the specific replay result described above. Specifically, even if the result of a normal replay is a normal replay, it is preferable to configure the automatic insertion process to be performed in steps S2414 to S2416.

(4) In the pseudo-bet presentation, if the wait period has not elapsed, the presentation will not switch to the bet-compatible presentation even if a start operation is performed during the bet process presentation. However, the presentation may be configured to switch to the bet-compatible presentation based on a start operation during the bet process presentation, regardless of whether the wait period has elapsed, i.e., regardless of whether rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun based on the start operation.

(5) In the case of a pseudo bet presentation, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation, the manner in which the bet process presentation is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the bet process presentation may be interrupted based on the start operation, and then resumed after the start operation based on the start operation has ended. In this case, the bet process presentation may be resumed from the point where it was interrupted, or from the beginning of the bet process presentation. Furthermore, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation, the output volume of the bet sound effect may be lowered, or the brightness of the lighting presentation may be lowered.

(6) In a simulated betting presentation, if a start operation is performed during a betting process presentation, the system may determine whether to limit the betting process presentation based on the betting process presentations that have already been performed and the remaining betting process presentations. For example, if the data volume or execution time of the remaining betting process presentation is less than a predetermined value, the betting process presentation may continue without interruption even if a start operation is performed during a betting process presentation. However, if the data volume or execution time of the remaining betting process presentation is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the betting process presentation may be interrupted. More specifically, for example, when performing a betting process presentation corresponding to three bets, if a start operation is performed when two bets have been completed, the betting process presentation may continue without interruption up to three bets. However, if a start operation is performed when one bet has been completed, the betting process presentation may be interrupted and switched to a bet-compatible presentation for three bets. Furthermore, if a start operation is performed during a waiting time between bets, the system may determine whether to interrupt or continue the betting process presentation depending on the elapsed time of the waiting time. The system may continue the betting process presentation if the waiting time is less than a predetermined time, but interrupt it if the waiting time is greater than or equal to the predetermined time.

(7) In a pseudo bet presentation, if a start operation is performed during a bet process presentation, the bet process presentation is interrupted and switched to a bet-compatible presentation. In this configuration, if the start operation is performed during a waiting time between bets, the presentation switches to the bet-compatible presentation without waiting for the waiting time to elapse. However, the presentation may be switched to the bet-compatible presentation after the waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, for example, in a three-bet bet presentation, if the start operation is performed during the waiting time before the second bet display unit 34b is turned on after the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, the second bet display unit 34b and the third bet display unit 34c may be turned on after the waiting time before the second bet display unit 34b is turned on has elapsed.

(8) In the pseudo betting presentation, when a start operation is performed during a betting process presentation, a process that restricts the betting process presentation or a process that restricts the start operation may be configured to execute another process. For example, a process that counts the number of start operations performed during the betting process presentation may be configured to execute a predetermined effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like depending on the number of start operations performed during the betting process presentation. The predetermined effect may be, for example, an effect that congratulates the player on the speed of operation, or conversely, an effect that warns that the situation is prone to erroneous operation.

(9) In the pseudo betting presentation, if a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation, the manner in which the betting process presentation is restricted may be varied depending on the progress of the betting process presentation. Specifically, if the start operation is performed at a first timing between the start and completion of the betting process presentation, a first restriction mode may be implemented, for example, by switching to a betting-compatible presentation at the first timing; and if the start operation is performed at a second timing between the start and completion of the betting process presentation and later than the first timing, a second restriction mode may be implemented, for example, by continuing the lighting presentation but restricting the output of betting sound effects.

(10) In the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side, all BET display units 75 are temporarily turned off, but the configuration may be such that the turning-off state is not performed. In this case, the BET display units 75 will remain lit, particularly in the replay setting process based on a specific replay result win.

(11) In the replay setting process based on a specific replay result win, a waiting time between bets may be provided, as in the case of a normal replay result win, and the first BET display unit 75a, the second BET display unit 75b, and the third BET display unit 75c may be configured to sequentially light up. In this case, the waiting time between bets in the case of a normal replay result win and the waiting time between bets in the case of a specific replay result win may be the same or different, and the waiting time may be longer or shorter for a normal replay result than for a specific replay result. However, it is preferable that the bets have been completed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is simulated to be operated based on a specific replay result win. In this case, it is preferable that the waiting time between bets be shorter for a specific replay result than for a normal replay result. Additionally, in the normal replay bet effect setting process, the waiting time between bets may not be set, so that the waiting time between bets is the same as the waiting time between bets in the case of a specific replay win.

(12) In the specific re-play bet effect setting process, the process is configured to proceed after the bet on the main control device 101 side is completed, but the process may be configured to proceed without waiting for the bet on the main control device 101 side to be completed. In this case, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated immediately after a specific re-play result is won, it is preferable that the bet on the main control device 101 side is completed earlier than the pseudo-bet effect on the display control device 81 side.

(13) Although the pseudo-bet effect is configured to be performed by the bet display unit 34 and speaker 64 on the display control device 81 side, the pseudo-bet effect may also be configured to be performed by the bet display unit 75 on the main control device 101 side.

(14) While the first credit lamp 56b is configured to be controlled by the display control device 81, it may also be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101. The bet display unit 34 and speaker 64 may also be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may execute processing for producing simulated bet effects, etc.

(15) If the trigger for the replay state is a specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and a pseudo-bet effect is performed, but the conditions for performing a pseudo-bet effect in the replay state may be different.

For example, in an AT mode start game, if a second replay result win or a third replay result win is achieved, a pseudo bet effect etc. is performed, but if a first replay result win is achieved, even in an AT mode start game, the configuration may be changed so that a pseudo bet effect etc. is not performed, and if any replay result win is achieved in an AT mode start game, a pseudo bet effect etc. is performed.

Furthermore, if the ending game of the AT mode results in a winning replay, a pseudo-bet effect may be displayed. Alternatively, a so-called RT state may be set up in which the winning probability of the replay result is increased, and a pseudo-bet effect may be displayed after the transition game to the RT state or the ending game results in a winning replay.

Furthermore, even after a specific replay result is won, the execution of pseudo-bet effects, etc. may be varied depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode, the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone, and the number of remaining increases until the upper limit of the advantageous zone. In cases such as when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, when the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is equal to or less than a predetermined number, or when the number of remaining increases until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it may be possible to configure the pseudo-bet effects, etc. not to be executed even after a specific replay result is won.

(16) When a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo-betting effect, whether or not to limit the betting process may be configured to vary depending on the trigger and circumstances of the pseudo-betting effect.

For example, if a second replay result win or a third replay result win is achieved as an AT mode start game, the betting process effect will be restricted if a start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect. However, even if the AT mode start game is a pseudo betting effect based on a first replay result win, the betting process effect may not be restricted even if a start operation is performed during the betting process effect.

In addition, if a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation of the ending game of the AT mode, the betting process presentation is restricted. However, if the start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation in the middle of the AT mode, the betting process presentation may not be restricted.

Furthermore, even after a specific replay result has been won, whether or not to restrict the betting process presentation when a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation may be varied depending on the number of games remaining in the AT mode, the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone, and the number of remaining increases until the upper limit of the advantageous zone.In other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, if the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is equal to or less than a predetermined number, or if the number of remaining increases until the upper limit of the advantageous zone is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the betting process presentation may not be restricted when a start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation, but may be restricted in the opposite case.

(17) In the above configuration, the first credit lamp 56 is built into the first credit insertion switch 56, and the first credit insertion switch 56 itself lights up. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a first credit lamp 56 is provided around the first credit insertion switch 56, and the area around the first credit insertion switch 56 lights up to prompt operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. Alternatively, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to enter a first state (for example, displaying "PUSH") that prompts operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and operating the first credit insertion switch 56 ends the display of the first state and switches to a second state (a state in which the above-mentioned "PUSH" is not displayed). Then, by switching these to the lit state or the first state, the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like may be prompted.

(18) While the first credit lamp 56b is provided to prompt the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, notification means corresponding to the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45 may also be provided, and the notification means may be configured to indicate, when in the first state, that it is possible to operate the bet number using the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45, and when in the second state, that it is not possible to operate the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45. Furthermore, by setting these notification means to the first state, the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like may be prompted.

(19) The waiting time (interval) between bets is different in the replay bet effect and the consecutive bet effect, but the waiting time between bets in the replay bet effect and the consecutive bet effect may be the same length, or the waiting time in the consecutive bet effect may be longer than the waiting time in the replay bet effect. The waiting time between bets in the pseudo bet effect is also the same as the waiting time in the consecutive bet effect, or the same as the waiting time in the replay bet effect if the wait period has not yet elapsed, but it may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the consecutive bet effect, or it may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the replay bet effect.

(20) Even in the case of a replay bet effect based on a normal replay result, or a bet process effect in a consecutive bet effect after a small win or a losing result, if a start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the bet process effect may be limited. In particular, when a predetermined start effect (e.g., a push order notification effect) is performed based on the start operation, it is considered highly significant to limit the bet process effect (e.g., switch to a bet-compatible effect).

(21) When the push order notification effect and the betting process effect overlap as start effects based on the start operation, the push order notification effect or the betting process effect is restricted. However, it is also possible to restrict the push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side.

(22) If a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo-betting presentation and a push order notification presentation is performed based on that start operation, the start of the push order notification presentation is delayed. However, the push order notification presentation may not be performed in that game. For example, if the AT mode is a navigation count-managed AT mode that is determined by the number of times the push order notification presentation is performed rather than the number of games, and if the push order notification presentation is prevented from being performed in that game, the push order notification presentation that was scheduled to be performed in that game may not be counted in the number of times it is performed, and the remaining number of times the push order notification presentation is not to be deducted.

(23) When a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo betting presentation and a push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed. However, the execution mode of the push order notification effect may be different. For example, under normal circumstances, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified using yellow numbers as a first execution mode. However, when a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo betting presentation, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified using purple numbers as a second execution mode. In this case, the push order notification effect in the second execution mode may be executed only when a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo betting presentation, or may be executed in other cases as well, not just when a start operation is performed during a betting process in a pseudo betting presentation. As another example, the push order notification effect in the second execution mode may be executed when the number of remaining sets in the AT mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

(24) While the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation is configured to differ before and after the waiting period has elapsed, the betting process presentation in the replay betting presentation and consecutive betting presentation may also be configured to differ before and after the waiting period has elapsed.

(25) In a configuration in which the mode of the betting process presentation is different before and after the wait period has elapsed, not only may the waiting time between bets be different, but other presentation modes may also be different. For example, the type of bet sound effect in the betting process presentation may be different before and after the wait period has elapsed, or the function of the bet display unit 34 may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode of the number of bets displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be different before and after the wait period has elapsed.

(26) In a configuration in which the standby state is not set in the replay state, the first credit lamp 56 may be configured to switch from an on state to an off state when a second transition period has elapsed during which the standby state can be set even in the replay state. In this case, if the replay state is based on a specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b will be turned off when the second transition period has elapsed.

(27) When set to standby mode, the BET display unit 75 and game status display unit 76 managed by the main control unit 101 may not be set to standby mode, while the BET display unit 34, first credit lamp 56b, auxiliary display unit 65, and speaker 64 managed by the display control unit 81 may be set to standby mode, or vice versa.

(28) The lottery results for each game during a so-called RT state, in which the probability of winning a replay result increases, may be defined as the replay result. In this case, the lottery results for each game during the RT state may be expressed as specific results, and specific results may include a first replay, a second replay, etc. Furthermore, the RT state may be defined as a replay state.

(29) The BET display unit 75 and the game status display unit 75 may be provided in a position different from the game panel 25. For example, the BET display unit 75 and the game status display unit 75 may be provided below the game panel 25, on the surface where the first credit insertion switch 56 and the effect switch 66 are provided, intersecting the game panel 25. They may also be configured to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the display control device 81 may be responsible for controlling the BET display unit 75 and the game status display unit 75, and the main control device 101 may be responsible for controlling the auxiliary display unit 65.

(30) The first transition period until transition to the temporary standby state is set to a period shorter than the second transition period until transition to the standby state. However, the first transition period may be set to a period longer than the second transition period, or the first transition period and the second transition period may be set to the same period.

(31) The replay status display unit 76a is configured to remain lit even when in standby mode, but may be configured to switch to an unlit state when in standby mode or provisional standby mode. The start-ready status display unit 76b and the acceptance-ready status display unit 76c are configured to switch to an unlit state when in standby mode, but may be configured to switch to an unlit state when in provisional standby mode, or may not be configured to switch to an unlit state when in standby mode.

(32) When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a replay state based on a specific replay result, the credits may be settled and the first credit lamp 56b may remain lit. In other words, the settlement of credits and the execution of the pseudo-bet effect may be based on different settlement operations.

(33) When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a replay state based on a specific replay result, the credits may be settled, a pseudo-bet presentation may be performed, and the first credit lamp 56b may be turned on. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b may be turned on instead of being turned off at the start of the pseudo-bet presentation, or the first credit lamp 56b may be turned off at the start of the pseudo-bet presentation and then switched on later (for example, after the pseudo-bet presentation has switched to a bet-compatible presentation).

(34) In the consecutive bet presentation, a configuration may be adopted in which a bet sound effect is not output. In this case, a bet sound effect may be output in the replay bet presentation, or a bet sound effect may not be output in the replay bet presentation. In a configuration in which a presentation equivalent to a replay bet presentation is performed before the wait period has elapsed, and a presentation equivalent to a consecutive bet presentation is performed after the wait period has elapsed, a configuration may be adopted in which a presentation equivalent to a replay bet presentation accompanied by a bet sound effect is performed before the wait period has elapsed, and a presentation equivalent to a consecutive bet presentation without a bet sound effect is performed after the wait period has elapsed.

(35) The pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 may be different from the pseudo-bet effect when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 45.

(36) Although the configuration is such that when a bet process effect overlaps with a start effect or freeze effect, one of them is limited, overlaps with the start effect or freeze effect are not limited to bet process effects, and may be bet effects that are performed based on any of the bet number operations.

(37) In the normal replay bet presentation setting process, the bet process presentation is configured to proceed each time a replay bet command is received from the main control device 101. However, instead of using a replay bet command, the display control device 81 may use a timer counter or the like to identify the interval between bets and then proceed with the bet process presentation. Furthermore, the replay bet presentation may be configured to only perform the bet-related presentation without performing the bet process presentation. In this case, by configuring the bet-related presentation on the display control device 81 to be performed after the bet in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 is completed, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the start operation being performed even though the bet has not been completed.

(38) When a start operation is performed during the bet process presentation, a freeze presentation is generated to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the wait period may be extended to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, while the freeze presentation has been described assuming that a display presentation is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may simply be delayed without a display presentation on the auxiliary display unit 65. Furthermore, the delay period for starting rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be varied depending on the remaining period of the bet process presentation. Specifically, if the remaining period of the bet process presentation is a first period, the start of rotation may be delayed for the first period or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the first period; if the remaining period of the bet process presentation is a second period that is longer than the first period, the start of rotation may be delayed for the second period or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the second period. Note that the delay period may be varied based on the remaining amount of presentation (remaining number of bets, remaining number of lit lights) rather than the remaining period of the bet process presentation.

(38) The ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration is acceptable as long as the rate of increase or decrease in ball payout (game media) or the manner of increase or decrease changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 being the same, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer than settings 1 and 5 to increase by the predetermined amount and take less time than settings 1 and 5 to decrease by the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(39) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(40) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

In a pachinko machine, for example, the inventions described above can be applied to gameplay characteristics such as a variable ball entry means that can be switched between an open state, in which a game ball can enter, and a closed state, in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the machine than in the open state, or in which the game ball cannot enter the machine at all, and in which, if a predetermined win/loss lottery is won, the variable ball entry means enters the open state and the machine transitions to a winning state in which multiple rounds of play can be played. When a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through a specific passing section (a V entry occurs), the game state after the winning state transitions to an advantageous state in which the probability of winning the predetermined win/loss judgment is higher, and when a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means does not pass through the specific passing section (a V entry does not occur), the game state after the winning state transitions to an unfavorable state in which the probability of winning the predetermined win/loss judgment is lower than in the advantageous state. In this case, by providing two options for announcing the result of the passage determination, whether or not a specific passage section has been passed, including whether the result is announced during the round of play in which the passage determination was made and whether the result is announced in a round of play after the round of play in which the passage determination was made, it is possible to take advantage of the player's desire to know the result of the passage determination and increase attention to not only the round of play in which the passage determination was made but also subsequent rounds of play. Furthermore, by sharing the same presentation mode and the same period of time from the passage determination to the result announcement between the case in which the result of the passage determination is made during the round of play in which the passage determination was made and the case in which the result of the passage determination is announced in a round of play after the round of play in which the passage determination was made, it becomes difficult to determine whether the announcement will be made across rounds of play, depending on the presentation mode and the period of time until the result announcement, making it more difficult to predict the result of the passage determination.

(41) In the above embodiment, an example was given of a gaming machine in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media, setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a prize corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not exclude medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) and start playing, and to award virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals as a prize corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to an external device.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned pachinko machines may not only be pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-type pachinko machines in which game balls are not ejected outside the machine. In such sealed-type pachinko machines, it is advisable to configure them to announce information indicating, for example, the number of winning balls.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that executes start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and executes stop drive control to stop rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing medal insertion response processing, first operation response processing, second operation response processing, etc. by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for the game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the bet operation of the bet operation means is performed, a specific notification (bet process presentation) is performed, and then a bet corresponding notification (bet corresponding presentation) corresponding to the bet set based on the bet operation is performed by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34). A bet number notification means (function of executing a bet time presentation setting process by the display control device 81)
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific processing means (a function that executes processing such as switching to a bet-compatible presentation based on a start operation command in a specific re-play bet presentation setting process by a display control device 81) that executes specific processing that can limit the specific notification being executed when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed.

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operation means, a lottery is held for that game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in an active position based on operation of the stop operation means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, when a bet operation is performed using the bet operation means, a bet is set, and after a specific notification, a bet corresponding to the set bet is issued. Therefore, not only can the player know the bet number set based on their own bet operation from the bet corresponding notification, but the specific notification also allows them to know that their bet operation has been accepted, making it possible to prevent unnecessary bet operations.

However, in this case, it is conceivable that, for example, the start operation means may be operated while a specific notification is being made but before a bet number notification is made, and rotation of the rotating body may be initiated based on that operation. In such cases, there is a high possibility that the effects and processing for starting rotation of the rotating body may overlap with the specific notification or processing for the specific notification, which could increase the processing load or cause confusion among players due to overlapping effects, etc.

The above configuration therefore includes a specific processing means that executes specific processing to limit the specific notification that is currently being executed when the start operation means is operated. This eliminates overlap between the spin start effect and the specific notification, and overlap between the spin start processing and the specific notification processing, making it possible to effectively avoid the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the specific processing means is configured to execute specific processing that restricts the execution of at least some of the specific notifications based on operation of the start operation means in the specific situation.

With the above configuration, if the start operating means is operated under specific circumstances while a specific notification is being executed, the execution of at least some of the specific notifications will be restricted, thereby eliminating overlap with the start notification executed based on the operation of the start operating means, and making it possible to effectively avoid situations where the two notifications overlap and confuse the player.

Feature A3: The specific notification is configured to include a first specific notification (a lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) and a second specific notification (a bet sound effect),
The gaming machine described in feature A2 is characterized in that the specific processing means is capable of executing the specific processing so as to restrict the execution of the first specific notification among the specific notifications, while allowing the execution of the second specific notification among the specific notifications, based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of Feature A2, and in particular, by configuring the system to restrict the execution of at least some notifications by restricting the execution of the first specific notification while performing specific processing to allow the execution of the second specific notification, it is possible to effectively avoid an increase in processing load caused by restricting the execution of all specific notifications, and it is also possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by stopping a specific notification that was being executed partway through.

The significance of limiting the execution of the first specific notification can be enhanced by limiting the above configuration to one in which "the first specific notification requires a larger amount of data to be executed or a larger processing load to be executed than the second specific notification." A specific example of such a configuration could be one in which "the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect, and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect."

On the other hand, if the configuration is limited to "the second specific notification has a larger amount of data to be executed or a larger processing load for the process to be executed than the first specific notification," it is possible to eliminate the waste of canceling a second specific notification that has already been set.In this case, the configuration can be expressed as "the second specific notification has a larger amount of data that has already been set or a larger processing load for the process that has already been executed than the first specific notification."

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, wherein the bet number notification means is capable of executing the bet number notification in the same manner as when no restriction is imposed, even if the restriction is imposed by the specific processing by the specific processing means (see, for example, Figure 74 (d)).

With the above configuration, specific notifications are limited based on the operation of the start operating means, but there is no need to change the format of bet amount notifications, regardless of whether or not they are limited. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to overlapping processes with a relatively simple configuration.

Note that the above "same appearance" does not necessarily mean exactly the same appearance, but may also mean an appearance that is different enough that it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish.

Furthermore, the above "same manner" can also be expressed as "same timing," which means that there is no need to change the timing at which the bet number notification starts, further reducing the processing load.

Feature A5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A4, wherein the bet number notification means is capable of executing the bet number-based notification based on the restriction on the specific notification being imposed by the specific processing by the specific processing means (see, for example, Figure 74 (b)).

With the above configuration, when the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the start operating means, it switches to a bet amount notification. This prevents a blank period in which the bet amount is unknown even though the rotation of each rotating body has begun based on the operation of the start operating means.

Feature A6: The specific notification is configured to include a first specific notification (a lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) by a first notification unit (bet display unit 34) and a second specific notification (a bet sound effect) by a second notification unit (speaker 64) different from the first notification unit,
The bet number notification means executes the bet number corresponding notification by the first notification unit,
The gaming machine described in feature A5 is characterized in that the specific processing means executes the specific processing so as to restrict the execution of the first specific notification among the specific notifications, while allowing the execution of the second specific notification among the specific notifications, based on the operation of the start operation means in the specific situation.

The above configuration makes it possible to effectively avoid an increase in processing load caused by restricting the execution of all specific notifications, and also makes it less likely that a player will feel uncomfortable when a specific notification that was being executed partway through is stopped. Furthermore, assuming that the bet number-based notification is performed by the first notification unit in particular, by restricting the first specific notification by the first notification unit and switching to a bet number-based notification, it is possible to prevent blank periods in which the first notification unit does not notify the number of bets.

Feature A7. When the start drive control is performed by the drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, a start notification means (a function for executing the start effect setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a start notification (push order notification effect, specific role notification effect, etc.) by a predetermined notification means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific processing means is capable of executing the specific processing when a predetermined start notification (push order notification effect) is made by the start notification means based on operation of the start operation means in the specific situation, but not executing the specific processing when the predetermined start notification is not made by the start notification means or when the predetermined start notification by the start notification means and the specific notification do not overlap (see, for example, Figure 78).

With the above configuration, if the start notification, which is the effect when the rotating body starts rotating, overlaps with a specific notification, a specific process is performed that can limit the specific notification. However, if the start notification is not executed or if the start notification and the specific notification do not overlap, the specific process is not executed. With this configuration, even if the specific process is intended to avoid overlapping notifications, the specific process will not be executed in situations where the notifications do not overlap and it is unnecessary, which can contribute to reducing the processing load.

Feature A8: A start limiting means (a function of executing a process of waiting for the start of rotation until a wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 has elapsed) that limits the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the start drive control was started;
When the start operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period has elapsed, an allowance means is capable of allowing the execution of the specific notification (a function of executing a process not to switch to a bet-compatible effect when a start operation is performed during a waiting period in the specific re-play bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
According to the above configuration, the start drive control and the start drive control are repeated for a specific period or longer, thereby limiting the number of games that can be executed per unit time and optimizing the game. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, if a bet number-based notification is issued via a specific notification based on a bet number operation before the specific period has elapsed, even if the start operation means is operated during the specific notification, the execution of the start drive control is restricted if the specific period has not elapsed. Therefore, in such a case, the inconvenience described in Feature A1, such as overlapping of the notification or processing for rotation start with the specific notification or the processing for the specific notification, is likely to not occur, or even if it does occur, the degree of inconvenience is likely to be low, and there is little need to restrict the specific notification. Therefore, in such a case, by providing an enabling means capable of allowing the execution of the specific notification, it is possible to avoid restricting the specific notification even in unnecessary situations, thereby optimizing the game presentation without causing discomfort to the player.

Feature A9: A start limiting means (a function of executing a process of waiting for the start of rotation until a wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 has elapsed) is provided that limits the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the start drive control was started,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the specific processing means is configured to be able to execute the specific processing so as to restrict the specific notification when the start operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period has elapsed and the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means is executed in the specific situation.

With the above configuration, the interval between start drive controls is longer than the specified period, limiting the number of games that can be played per unit time and optimizing play. In such a configuration in which a specified period is set and a so-called weight is defined, if a bet number-based notification is made via a specific notification based on a bet number operation before the specified period has elapsed, even if the start operation means is operated during the specific notification, the execution of the start drive control will be restricted if it is before the specified period has elapsed. However, there are cases in which the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means is executed based on the elapse of the specified period, and the specific notification may not have ended at the time such start drive control is executed. In this regard, the above configuration is configured to execute specific processing so that the specific notification is restricted when the start drive control is executed in such a situation. This makes it possible to restrict specific notifications while executing specific processing in unnecessary situations, thereby increasing the effectiveness of the specific processing.

Feature A10. The device is provided with a re-game setting means (a function for executing a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) that executes a re-game process that enables a player to take a lottery again in a re-game state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets made on the lottery by the lottery means that resulted in the re-game result are set when the lottery result by the lottery means is a re-game result and a pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result has stopped at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that the bet number notification means is equipped with a specific bet number notification means (a function of executing a specific replay bet presentation setting process by a display control device 81) that, when the replay processing is performed based on a specific replay result (specific replay result), executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and then executes the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay processing.

With the above configuration, when a specific replay result results in a win and replay processing is performed, a bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay processing is made based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means. Moreover, even in this case, because a specific notification is made before the bet amount notification, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. By doing this, even for replay results that result in replay processing, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as play after other minor win results or loss results, allowing the game to proceed without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, by giving the player the impression that this is not a replay result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other minor win results or loss results, for example, thereby greatly contributing to the diversification of games.

The "replay result" may also be defined as "a replay result in which, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, the bonus awarding means awards a replay that allows the player to be drawn again by the lottery means with the same number of bets as the current number of bets." This also applies to "replay results" for other features and other groups of features.

The above configuration also clarifies the above effects by limiting the minor winning results and losing results as described below. This can also be applied when clarifying the relationship between other features and "replay results" in other feature groups.

"As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a small prize result (for example, a small prize result) in which a predetermined number of game values is awarded as a prize by the prize awarding means is set,
The bet amount notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means in the next game after the predetermined number of game values is awarded by the bonus awarding means based on the result of the small win, and then executes the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation." or "A losing result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
The bet number notification means, in the next game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result, executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and then executes the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10 is characterized in that the bet amount notification means is equipped with predetermined bet amount notification means (a function of executing normal replay bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81) that can execute the bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay processing without the bet amount operation by the bet amount operation means when the replay processing is performed based on a predetermined replay result (normal replay result) different from the specific replay result.

The above configuration clarifies the unique nature of a bet amount-based notification being made after a bet amount operation in the case of a specific replay result. In other words, while a bet amount-based notification would normally be made without bet amount operation, as with a predetermined replay result, it is made clear that a bet amount-based notification is made after a bet amount operation in the case of a specific replay result. This makes it possible to give the strong impression that a specific replay result is not just another type of replay result like a predetermined replay result, but is treated the same as other minor winning results or losing results, thereby diversifying games. In diversifying games in this way, there is a possibility that the start operation means will be operated under certain circumstances, as described in Feature A1, greatly enhancing the significance of providing specific processing means that executes specific processing that can restrict specific notifications.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, wherein the predetermined bet number notification means is configured to execute the bet number-based notification without executing the specific notification, or to execute the bet number-based notification after executing a predetermined notification different from the specific notification.

With the above configuration, not only does the presence or absence of a bet operation differ between a predetermined replay result and a specific replay result, but the notification mode leading up to the bet amount notification also differs. In this case, since the notification mode for the specific replay result is the same as for other minor win results and loss results, the above configuration can help give the impression that the specific replay result is not a replay result like a predetermined replay result, but is treated the same as other minor win results and loss results.

Feature A13: A second bet number informing means (a function of executing a bet process by the main control device 101) is provided that, when a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operating means, causes a bet number corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means to be notified by a predetermined informing means (BET display unit 75) different from the specific informing means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A10 to A12, characterized in that when the replay processing is performed by the replay setting means, the second bet number notification means is configured to be able to execute the bet number notification without the bet number operation, regardless of the type of replay result that triggered the replay processing.

According to the above configuration, when replay processing is performed based on a specific replay result, the bet amount notification is performed based on the bet amount operation, and the bet amount notification from the second bet amount notification means is performed without the bet amount operation regardless of the type of replay result. This configuration allows the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or losing results through the bet amount notification, while also making it possible to confirm that the specific replay result is a type of replay result. For example, it enables the manager of the amusement hall to easily detect fraudulent behavior such as performing replay processing even though it is not a replay result, or fraudulent behavior that takes advantage of the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or losing results in order to enjoy the benefits of a specific replay result even though it is actually another small win result.

Not only that, but because the bet amount is set when the replay process is performed, the configuration is such that, for specific replay results, unnecessary bet amount manipulation is performed for presentation purposes. By configuring the second bet amount reporting means to report the bet amount without manipulating the bet amount, as in the above configuration, it is possible to clearly state that the configuration allows the start operation to be performed without manipulating the bet amount, even after a specific replay result.

Feature A14. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount up to a predetermined specific amount;
the specific notification means has the specific number of notification sections (bet display sections 34a to 34c), and each notification section is configured to be switchable between a notification state (lighting state) and a non-notification state (lighting off state);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the bet number notification means sequentially switches the notification units in a number corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means to the notification state as the specific notification, and executes the state in which the notification units in a number corresponding to the bet number have switched to the notification state as the bet number corresponding notification.

The above configuration is a specific configuration for bet number-based notifications and specific notifications. In particular, by configuring specific notifications as notification units sequentially switching to a notification state in numbers corresponding to the set bet number, even when setting bet numbers one by one, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by seeing the corresponding notification unit switch to a notification state.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, wherein the bet number notification means is configured to switch a predetermined notification unit to the notification state when making the specific notification, and after a predetermined period (0.1 sec or 0.2 sec), switch the notification unit next to the predetermined notification unit to the notification state.

As in the above configuration, if the notification unit is configured to switch to the notification state sequentially at predetermined intervals during the specific notification, the specific notification will be made over a relatively long period of time depending on the number of bets. As a result, it becomes more likely that the start operating means will be operated during the specific notification, further enhancing the significance of providing the specific processing means of feature A1.

Feature A16. The bonus awarding means includes a re-play setting means (a function of executing a re-play setting process by the main control device 101) that executes a re-play process in which, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a re-play result and a symbol combination corresponding to the re-play result stops at the valid position, the bonus corresponding to the re-play result is that the same number of bets as the number of bets on which the lottery by the lottery means that resulted in the re-play result was set by the bet number setting means, and the player can once again take the lottery by the lottery means;
When the replay process is performed based on the special replay result (normal rep A to C), if the situation resulting in the special replay result is a predetermined special situation (for example, an AT start game), the bet number notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, and then executes the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay process. On the other hand, if the situation resulting in the special replay result (normal rep A to C) is a situation different from the special situation (for example, a normal game state), the bet number A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that it is equipped with a special bet number notification means (a function that performs a specific replay bet presentation setting process when the display control device 81 achieves a second replay result winning or a third replay result winning in normal replies A to C, and performs a normal replay bet presentation setting process when the display control device 81 achieves a first replay result winning in normal replies A to C) that can execute the special bet number notification means and then execute the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay process without the need for bet number operation by the operating means.

According to the above configuration, when a special replay result is won and replay processing is performed, the bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay processing is made based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount operation means if the circumstances under which the special replay result is won are special circumstances, but is made without the bet amount operation if the circumstances are not special circumstances. In this case, if a special situation occurs, a specific notification is made before the bet amount notification, resulting in the same notification mode as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. By doing this, even if the replay result results in replay processing, depending on the circumstances, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same way as after other small wins or losing results, thereby optimizing the game progress. By giving the player the impression that it is not a replay result, it is possible to expect the effect of making the special replay result seem like other small wins or losing results, for example, and by using the effect of making the player think of other small wins or losing results, it is possible to diversify the game.

Furthermore, when the above configuration is applied to feature A10, feature A11, and other features that reference these, the "special replay result" may be the same result as either a "specific replay result" or a "predetermined replay result," or it may be a result different from a "specific replay result" or a "predetermined replay result."

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "special replay result" may be a result that overlaps with a "specific replay result" and a "predetermined replay result," so that if a special situation occurs, the specific replay result will be won, and if a special situation does not occur, the predetermined replay result will be won.

Feature A17. A first gaming state (normal mode) and a second gaming state (AT mode) different from the first gaming state are set as gaming states.
A gaming machine described in feature A16, characterized in that the special situation is a situation in which a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs.

As configured above, if a special replay result win occurs in a situation where a transition in game state occurs, and a bet amount notification is made based on the bet amount operation, the transition to the second game state can be started from the bet amount operation, allowing the player to start the second game state with a fresh feeling without the results of the previous first game state being carried over.

Feature A18. Equipped with advantage determination means (for example, a function to execute AT mode transition lottery processing by the main control device 101) that generates advantageous events that are advantageous to the player based on the lottery results by the lottery means,
a first specific result (specific re-game result) and a second specific result (for example, a normal re-game result) are set as the lottery results by the lottery means;
the advantageous determination means is configured such that when the advantageous determination is made based on the first identification result, it is more likely to result in the advantageous event occurring or to result in the advantageous event occurring more advantageously than when the advantageous determination is made based on the second identification result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, if the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed after the rotation of the rotating body in the game that resulted in the first specific result has stopped, the specific processing will be executed, whereas when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, if the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed after the rotation of the rotating body in the game that resulted in the second specific result has stopped, the specific processing will not be executed.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first specific result is more likely to result in a favorable judgment than the second specific result, after the first specific result, the specific notification is restricted if the start operation means is operated in a specific situation, whereas after the second specific result, the specific notification is not restricted even if the start operation means is operated in the same specific situation. By doing this, for example, it is possible to configure the result of the favorable judgment to be notified based on the operation of the start operation means, or the more favorable the result of the favorable judgment, the more likely it is that the specific notification will be restricted midway in situations where it is necessary to speed up the game progress, making it possible to preferably avoid the rotation of the rotating body starting during the specific notification.

Feature A19. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57) for performing an operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process or a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the bet number operation means is operated, a bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time presentation setting process by the display control device 81) executes a specific notification (a bet process presentation) and then executes a bet number corresponding notification (a bet corresponding presentation) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific processing means (a function that executes processing such as switching to a bet-compatible presentation based on a start operation command in a specific re-play bet presentation setting process by a display control device 81) that executes a predetermined specific process when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed.

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operating means, a lottery for that game is conducted, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operating means. In this type of gaming machine, when the bet amount operating means is operated, the game bet amount is set, and after a specific notification, a bet amount notification corresponding to the game bet amount is issued by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the start operating means may be operated during the execution of a specific notification, and rotation of the rotating body may begin based on that operation. In such a case, there is a high possibility that the effects and processing for the rotation start will overlap with the specific notification and processing for the specific notification, raising concerns about increased processing load and the possibility of player confusion due to overlapping effects, etc.

The above configuration therefore includes a specific processing means that executes a specific process when the start operation means is operated while a specific notification is being executed. By setting the specific process as a process to eliminate, for example, overlap between the spin start effect and the specific notification, or overlap between the spin start process and the specific notification process, it is possible to effectively avoid the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

The configurations defined by features A1 to A18 may be applied individually or in combination to feature A19 above. Also, some of the configurations defined by features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

Feature A20. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57) for performing an operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process or a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the bet number operation means is operated, a bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time presentation setting process by the display control device 81) executes a specific notification (a bet process presentation) and then executes a bet number corresponding notification (a bet corresponding presentation) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a predetermined notification means;
When the rotation of each of the rotating bodies is started by the drive control means, a start notification means (a function of executing a start performance setting process by the display control device 81) executes a start notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific processing means (a function that executes a process to switch to a bet-compatible presentation based on a start operation command in a specific re-play bet presentation setting process by a display control device 81, a process to delay the start of a push order notification presentation, etc.) that executes a specific process that can restrict either the specific presentation or the start notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed.

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operating means, a lottery for that game is conducted, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operating means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, the bet amount for the game is set when the bet amount operating means is operated, and after a specific notification, a bet amount notification corresponding to the game bet is issued by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the start operating means may be operated during the execution of a specific notification, and rotation of the rotating body may begin based on that operation. In such a case, there is a high possibility that the start notification and processing for the rotation will overlap with the specific notification and processing for the specific notification, raising concerns about an increase in processing load and the possibility of player confusion due to overlapping effects, etc.

The above configuration therefore includes a specific processing means that executes specific processing that can restrict the specific notification or start notification when the start operation means is operated while the specific notification is being executed. This makes it possible to eliminate overlaps between start notifications and specific notifications, and between processing for start notifications and processing for specific notifications. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

The configurations defined by features A1 to A18 may be applied individually or in combination to feature A20 above. Also, some of the configurations defined by features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

The inventions described in Features A1 to A20 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop according to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features A1 to A20 address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to optimize game progress, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

For each of the features A1 to A20 above, the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) for performing an operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a re-game result is set in which the same number of bets as the number of bets on which the lottery was currently drawn by the lottery means is set, and it is possible to take the lottery again by the lottery means in a re-game state,
An operation notification means (first credit lamp 56b) provided for the bet number operation means and switchable between a first notification state (lighting state) and a second notification state (lighting off state);
a first control means for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state (a function for executing processing by the display control device 81 to turn on the first credit lamp 56b);
A second control means (a function of executing consecutive bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for switching the operation notification means to the second notification state when the bet number operation means is operated while the operation notification means is in the first notification state;
a third control means (a function of executing a specific re-play bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) that does not set the operation notification means to the first notification state in the re-play state when the re-play result that triggered the setting of the re-play state is a predetermined re-play result, but sets the operation notification means to the first notification state in the re-play state when the re-play result that triggered the setting of the re-play state is a specific re-play result different from the predetermined re-play result;
a fourth control means (a function of executing standby processing by the display control device 81) for maintaining the first notification state of the operation notification means, which is set when the specific replay result is obtained, for a specific period of time, and switching the operation notification means to the second notification state when the specific period has elapsed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, the bet amount for a game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, game play is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held based on the set bet amount, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded. An operation notification means is provided for the bet amount operation means, and when the bet amount can be set by operating the bet amount operation means, the first notification state is entered, and when an operation is performed while the first notification state is entered, the first notification state is switched to the second notification state. This makes it easy for players to understand that operation of the bet amount operation means is required to start game play, and that when the bet amount operation means is operated, the operation is accepted.

In this case, a replay result is set that allows the player to re-enter the lottery with the same bet amount as the lottery result, and there is no need to set a new bet amount after the replay result. However, in the above configuration, if the replay result is a specified one, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state to make it clear that a new bet amount does not need to be set, but if the replay result is a specific one, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state to prompt the player to operate the bet amount operation means. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or losing results.

However, these predetermined replay results and specific replay results are merely replay results, and if, for example, play ends with a winning replay result, the player will have abandoned at least one play, even though it would have been possible to play at least once without setting a new bet. Furthermore, if the gaming parlor closes and it is possible to play the following day without having to set a new bet, the player will understand that the state of the winning replay result from the previous day has been carried over, and that the set value has not been changed. Conversely, if a player is required to set a new bet the following day, the player will understand that the set value may have been changed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first notification state is entered based on a specific replay result, the first notification state is maintained for a specific period of time, giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or loss results. However, after the specific period has elapsed, the first notification state is switched to the second notification state, resulting in the same notification mode as other specified replay results, making it possible to clearly understand the situation in which a winning replay result has been achieved.

Feature B2. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a small winning result in which a predetermined number of game values is awarded by the bonus awarding means is provided,
A fifth control means (a function of executing a process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81) that can set the operation notification means to the first notification state after the lottery result by the lottery means is the small winning result and the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the small winning result has stopped;
A sixth control means (a function of executing a process of not setting the display control device 81 to a temporary standby state after a small win has been achieved) that can maintain the first notification state when the specific period has elapsed after the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the small win result has stopped and the operation notification means has been set to the first notification state;
The gaming machine according to feature B1 is characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, after a small win result, the operation notification means can be set to the first notification state, just as with a specific replay result. On the other hand, after a specific period has passed, the operation notification means is set to the second notification state in the case of a specific replay result, and the first notification state is maintained in the case of a small win result. By doing this, the configuration of feature B1 not only allows the player to understand that a specific replay result win has been achieved, but also makes it possible to determine whether a specific replay result win has occurred or whether a small win result has occurred.

In other words, for example, if a small win result results in a stop roll similar to a specific replay result, the operation notification means can be set to the first notification state regardless of the result, but after the specific replay result, it will be set to the second notification state after a specific period of time has passed, and after a small win result with a similar stop roll, it will not be set to the second notification state even after the specific period of time has passed. This creates a difference, and it is possible to realize new gameplay features, such as allowing the player to know which result occurred based on the change in state of the operation notification means after the specific period of time. This can also be useful in increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature B3: A replay notification means (a function for executing processing for the game status display unit by the main control device 101) that can execute a replay notification that the replay status has been set by a predetermined notification means (replay status display unit 76a) that is smaller than the operation notification means,
A gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the re-play notification means is configured to execute the re-play notification regardless of the type of re-play result that triggered the setting of the re-play state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to know that a replay result win has been achieved through the replay notification from the replay notification means. In this way, in the case of a specific replay result, it is possible to clearly know that it is a replay result by checking the replay notification without checking the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. In this case, since the replay notification is performed by a predetermined notification means that is smaller than the operation notification means, it is possible to confirm that it is a replay result, but the replay notification is less noticeable than the operation notification means and is less likely to become an obstacle that gives the impression that the specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or loss results. In this way, it is possible to confirm that it is a replay result while contributing to the diversification of games using specific replay results.

Feature B4. A gaming machine as described in Feature B3, wherein the replay notification means is capable of executing the replay notification even after the specified period has elapsed.

With the above configuration, after the specific period has elapsed, it is possible to confirm that a winning replay result has been achieved by the replay notification rather than by a change in the notification state of the operation notification means. In other words, if a replay notification is made after the specific period has elapsed, it will be unclear whether this is after a winning predetermined replay result or a winning specific replay result. For example, in a configuration where the winning numbers for the predetermined replay result and the specific replay result are similar and it is difficult to distinguish which replay result it is, by confirming that the operation notification means is in the first notification state before the specific period has elapsed, it becomes possible to determine that a specific replay result has been achieved, and this can also effectively increase attention to the operation notification means.

Feature B5. A presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that performs presentations according to the progress of the game;
a standby means for setting the presentation means to a standby state when no game is played for a predetermined period of time after one game has ended (a function for executing a process for setting the auxiliary display unit 65 to a standby state by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period is a period of a different length from the predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the first notification state of the operation notification means based on a specific replay result switches to the second notification state at a timing different from the timing at which the presentation means switches to a standby state, a so-called demo state. This makes it possible to avoid confusion in games where players are trying to determine which replay result is due to a change in the notification state of the operation notification means, as it can be assumed that the change in notification state has occurred due to the switch to standby state. Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which the operation notification means switches to the first notification state after a small win result or a loss result, it is also possible to set the operation notification means that is in the first notification state after the small win result, etc., to the second notification state when it switches to standby state. In such a configuration, it is possible to achieve gameplay that allows players to determine whether the result was a specific replay result or a small win result, etc., based on the timing at which the operation notification means switches from the first notification state to the second notification state.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

The predetermined period before switching to a standby state, known as a demo state, is generally set to a relatively long period, but by using the above configuration, it is possible to play a game that allows the player to determine whether the result was a specific replay result or a small winning result, as described in Feature B2, without having to wait such a long period.

Feature B7: A presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that performs presentations according to the progress of the game;
a standby means for setting the presentation means to a standby state when no game is played for a predetermined period of time after one game has ended (a function for executing a process for setting the auxiliary display unit 65 to a standby state by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing to notify a specific replay winning by the display control device 81) that can make the manner of the standby state different when the standby means sets the standby state in the replay state set based on at least the specific replay result and when the standby state is set by the standby means after a result different from the specific replay result.

With the above configuration, when the game enters standby mode, the player can clearly tell from the state of the standby mode that a specific replay result has occurred. In this case, if the player attempts to determine from the state of the standby mode that a specific replay result has been won, the player will need to suspend play for at least the specified period of time until the game enters standby mode. This makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay features that take advantage of the player's eagerness to know the result and make them look forward to the period until the game enters standby mode.

Feature B8. A presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that performs presentations according to the progress of the game;
a standby means for setting the presentation means to a standby state when no game is played for a predetermined period of time after one game has ended (a function for executing a process for setting the auxiliary display unit 65 to a standby state by the display control device 81);
A means for restricting the standby state from being set by the standby means in the re-play state (a function for executing a process for disallowing counting of the standby counter in the re-play state by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that it is provided with:

With the above configuration, even if a predetermined period of time has passed since the replay state was set and the operation notification means has switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, the standby state in the replay state is restricted. Therefore, the standby state itself may be restricted even after the predetermined period has passed, the standby state may be restricted so that only a portion of the presentation means is in standby state, or the standby state may not be entered even after the predetermined period has passed and may be entered afterwards, thereby restricting the period until the standby state is entered. In this way, it is possible to make the switch from the first notification state to the second notification state when a specific period of time has passed in the replay state more noticeable, and by using this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that a win has been achieved as a result of the replay.

Feature B9: A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) is provided for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined upper limit,
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set based on the operation of the bet number operation means, whereas when the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is not set even when the bet number operation means is operated;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the third control means sets the operation notification means to the first notification state in the re-play state if the re-play result that triggered the setting of the re-play state is the specific re-play result, regardless of the number of virtual play values stored in the virtual play value storage means.

With the above configuration, if the replay state is after a specific replay result, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state even if virtual game value equivalent to the specific number of bets is not stored. By doing so, when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after a specific replay result, there is no need to know the number of virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means, simplifying the processing configuration. Furthermore, even if no virtual game value is stored in the virtual game value storage means, it is possible to inform the player that a specific replay result has been won by setting the operation notification means to the first notification state.

Feature B10: A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) that stores a virtual game value up to a predetermined upper limit;
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set based on the operation of the bet number operation means, whereas when the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is not set even when the bet number operation means is operated;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a settlement means (a function of executing medal return processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing settlement of game values in a number corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that it is equipped with a continuation means that can keep the operation notification means in the first notification state when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific re-play result (a function that does not turn off the first credit lamp 56 on the display control device 81 side by not performing settlement processing if the third transition period has not elapsed or the settlement operation counter has not reached a specific number in the medal return processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the settlement operation means is operated, the game value equivalent to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled. If the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on a specific replay result, the first notification state continues even if the settlement operation means is operated. Because the stored virtual game value is settled as game value when the settlement operation means is operated, the state basically becomes one in which no settable virtual game value is stored, even if the bet number operation means is operated. However, after a small win or a losing result, the operation notification means is also thought to switch from the first notification state to the second notification state. In contrast, when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on a specific replay result, the bet number can be set regardless of the number of stored virtual game values. In this case, the first notification state continues even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, it is possible to realize new gameplay features, such as allowing players to know that a specific replay result has occurred by operating the settlement operation means and checking whether or not the notification state of the bet amount notification means has changed.

The above-mentioned advantageous effects can be more effectively achieved by configuring the device to include "means for switching the operation notification means, which is in the first notification state, to the second notification state when the settlement operation means is operated and the number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled."

The "settlement means" may also be expressed as "payout means (a function that executes medal return processing by the main control device 101) that is capable of paying out at least the amount of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated," and this change in the expression "settlement means" can also be applied to other feature groups and other features that use similar expressions.

Feature B11. A gaming machine as described in Feature B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a liquidation limiting means that, when the liquidation operation means is operated, can limit the execution of liquidation of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means (a function that does not perform liquidation processing if the third transition period has not elapsed or the liquidation operation counter has not reached a specific number during the medal return processing by the main control device 101).

With the above configuration, even if the settlement operation means is operated, the settlement of virtual gaming value may be limited by the settlement limiting means. In this way, if the first notification state is maintained even when the settlement operation means is operated while the bet amount notification means is in the first notification state, it becomes difficult to tell that the first notification state has been set based on a specific replay result. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the interest in gameplay by operating the settlement operation means and discerning that a specific replay result has been achieved.

Feature B12: The liquidation limiting means can limit the execution of liquidation of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the liquidation operation means,
The gaming machine described in feature B11 is characterized in that the settlement means is configured to execute settlement of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on operations of the settlement operation means that exceed the specific number.

The above configuration achieves the effect of feature B11 while eliminating the inconvenience of being unable to settle the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means even when the player wishes to do so.

Feature B13. A gaming machine as described in Feature B11 or Feature B12, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting the operation notification means to the second notification state when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific replay result, and when a number of game values equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled based on operation of the settlement operation means (a function for executing processing to turn off the first credit lamp 56b based on a specific settlement command from the display control device 81).

With the above configuration, the operation notification means, which has been set to the first notification state based on a specific replay result, is set to the second notification state when the virtual game value is settled. In this way, if an operation to settle the virtual game value is performed after a specific replay result, the settlement may be restricted or the first notification state may continue, but once settlement is performed, the state will switch from the first notification state to the second notification state, and the notification state of the operation notification means will become the same as for other game results. This makes it easier for only the player who performed the settlement operation to recognize that the replay result is specific, and it is possible to favorably guarantee the advantage of players who recognize that the settlement operation is a specific replay result.

Feature B14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B10 to B13, wherein the settlement means is configured to execute settlement of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state.

As in the above configuration, if it is possible to settle virtual game value even in a replay state, it becomes more likely that play will end in a replay state based on a specific replay result, and the significance of letting the player know that a specific replay result has occurred is enhanced by the fact that the first notification state of the operation notification means is continued by the settlement operation, as in feature B12.

Feature B15. The gaming machine described in Feature B14 is configured such that, when the settlement operation means is operated after a special period shorter than the specific period has elapsed since the re-play state was set, the settlement means is able to execute settlement of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means.

With the above configuration, in the replay state, virtual game value cannot be settled until the special period has elapsed. This makes it easier to understand that the game is in the replay state.

The inventions described in Features B1 to B15 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features B1 to B15 address the following background art: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features B1 to B15 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57) for performing bet amount operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process or a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a bet amount notification means for executing a bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means (a function for executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bet number notification means is equipped with a specific bet number notification means (a function that does not perform temporary standby processing of the bet display unit 34 in the replay state by the display control device 81) that can terminate the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the number of bets used in the lottery that resulted in the first result when a predetermined specific period has elapsed in a first specific situation in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (small win result) and the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the first result has stopped, while continuing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the number of bets used in the lottery that resulted in the second result even after the specific period has elapsed in a second specific situation in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific replay result) different from the first result and the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the second result has stopped.

In this configuration, a so-called slot machine gaming machine sets the number of bets for a game based on the bet operation of the bet operation means, starts a game based on the operation of the start operation means, draws a lottery based on the set number of bets, and awards a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means. If the result of the game is a first result, the bet number notification corresponding to each game bet ends when a specific period of time has passed since the current game ended, when the rotating body stops or a bonus is awarded, but does not end when the result of the game is a second result. This configuration allows the player to determine the result of the lottery based on the number of bets the rotating body stops, while also making good use of the length of time that the existing bet number notification continues. For example, in cases where it is difficult to determine the result from the number of bets that stops, it is possible to play a game in which the player determines the result based on whether the bet number notification ends after a specific period of time has passed. In particular, by allowing the outcome to be determined after a specific period of time has passed, it is possible to provide a new type of gameplay in which the outcome can be determined by waiting after the rotating body has stopped, which is the exact opposite of the conventional gameplay that aims to increase interest in the game while promoting smooth gameplay progression. This type of gameplay can also make a significant contribution to increasing interest in the game.

Note that the "first specific situation" and "second specific situation" may also be expressed as follows, and such changes in expression can also be applied to other features or groups of features that use corresponding expressions.

"A first specific situation in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a first result (small winnings result), and the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies initiated based on the operation of the start operating means, which has resulted in the lottery being held corresponding to the first result, has stopped, or a bonus has been awarded by the bonus awarding means." "A second specific situation in which the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a second result (specific replay result), and the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies initiated based on the operation of the start operating means, which has resulted in the lottery being held corresponding to the second result, has stopped, or a bonus has been awarded by the bonus awarding means."

Feature C2: When a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means while the bet number notification means is executing the bet number corresponding notification, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then an update notification can be executed to update the bet number corresponding notification to one corresponding to the current bet (a function of executing a process in which the display control device 81 temporarily turns off the bet display unit 34 based on various bet number operations and then causes the bet corresponding notification to be executed),
the update means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation;
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that, when the update notification is made by the update means in the first specific situation, the specific bet number notification means is capable of continuing the bet number corresponding notification after the specific period has elapsed.

With the above configuration, when a bet operation is performed after any result, the previous bet number notification is terminated and then updated to the bet number notification corresponding to the current bet number operation. In this case, after a bet number operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet number notification continues even after a specific period has passed. This makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay in which waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging a player from performing a bet number operation if the player attempts to determine the result based on whether or not the bet number notification continues after the specific period has passed. Furthermore, if a player performs a bet number operation to play a new game, the bet number notification updated by that bet number operation can ensure the player's bet number is displayed regardless of the result of the previous game.

Feature C3. A presentation means (auxiliary display unit 65) that performs presentations according to the progress of the game;
a standby means (a function of executing standby processing by the display control device 81) that sets the presentation means to a standby state when no game is played for a predetermined period longer than the specific period after one game is finished;
A means for allowing the standby means to enter the standby state in the first specific situation, while restricting the standby means from entering the standby state in the second specific situation (a function for executing a process for disallowing counting of the standby counter in the replay state by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that it is provided with:

With the above configuration, the presentation means goes into standby mode when a predetermined period of time has passed since the first specific situation occurred after a game resulting in the first result, and the bet amount notification ends when the specific period has passed. However, even if a predetermined period of time has passed since the second specific situation occurred after a game resulting in the second result, the presentation means is restricted from going into standby mode, and the bet amount notification does not end even when the specific period has passed. In this way, by increasing the number of factors for determining whether the first or second result has occurred, the excitement of the game, which allows players to distinguish between the two results, is enhanced.

Feature C4: When a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means while the bet number notification means is executing the bet number corresponding notification, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then an update notification can be executed to update the bet number corresponding notification to one corresponding to the current bet (a function of executing a process in which the display control device 81 temporarily turns off the bet display unit 34 based on various bet number operations and then causes the bet corresponding notification to be executed),
the update means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation;
The gaming machine described in feature C3 is characterized in that when the update notification is made by the update means in the first specific situation, the specific bet number notification means is capable of continuing the bet number corresponding notification after the specific period has elapsed, while terminating the bet number corresponding notification by entering the standby state.

With the above configuration, when a bet operation is performed after any result, the previous bet number notification is terminated and then updated to the bet number notification corresponding to the current bet number operation. In this case, after a bet number operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet number notification continues even after a specific period has passed. This makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay in which waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging a player from performing a bet number operation if the player attempts to determine the result based on whether or not the bet number notification continues after the specific period has passed. Furthermore, if a player performs a bet number operation to play a new game, the bet number notification updated by that bet number operation can ensure the player's bet number is displayed regardless of the result of the previous game.

Furthermore, once the standby state is entered, the bet amount notification will end in the first specific situation after the first result. Therefore, if a player accidentally changes the bet amount, they can simply wait a predetermined period of time until the standby state is entered, making it possible to conveniently remedy the player's mistaken operation.

Feature C5. As the lottery results by the lottery means, a small winning result in which a predetermined number of game values is awarded as a benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and a re-play result in which a re-play state is set in which a lottery by the lottery means can be again taken with the same number of bets as the current number of bets are set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the first result is a predetermined small winning result, and the second result is a predetermined replay result.

According to the above configuration, in the case of a minor winning result in which a predetermined amount of game value is awarded, a bet number-based notification is made for a specific period in a first specific situation following the end of the game that resulted in that minor winning result, and then the bet number-based notification ends. In contrast, in the case of a replay result that is set to a replay state, the bet number-based notification continues even after the specific period in a second specific situation following the end of the game that resulted in that replay result. In the case of a replay result, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game that resulted in that replay result, and the bet number-based notification corresponding to the game that resulted in the replay can be used as the bet number-based notification for the next game. Therefore, by continuing the bet number-based notification even after a specific period as in the above configuration, it is possible to omit a state change in the bet number-based notification without causing any inconsistencies with the progress of the game.

Feature C6: When a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means while the bet number notification means is executing the bet number corresponding notification, the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated and then an update notification can be executed to update the bet number corresponding notification to one corresponding to the current bet (a function of executing a process in which the display control device 81 temporarily turns off the bet display unit 34 based on various bet number operations and then executes a bet corresponding notification),
The gaming machine described in feature C5 is characterized in that, when a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means in the re-play state set based on the re-play result, the update means is capable of executing an update notification to update the bet number corresponding notification to the bet number corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play state after terminating the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the lottery that resulted in the re-play.

With the above configuration, when a replay result is reached, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game that resulted in the replay result. Even if the same bet-number-based notification itself can be reused, an updated notification is issued based on the bet-number manipulation. This allows the game flow to be the same as that of a game that requires a bet-number manipulation to set a new bet, such as the first result as a minor winning result, making it difficult to distinguish between the first result and the second result. Therefore, there is an increased need to determine the result based on whether or not there is a change in the state of the bet-number-based notification after a specific period of time, which can increase the enjoyment of such games.

Feature C7. A predetermined replay result and a specific replay result are set as the replay result,
The gaming machine described in feature C6 is characterized in that, when the re-play state is set based on the specified re-play result, the update means executes the update notification without the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, while, when the re-play state is set based on the specific re-play result, the update means executes the update notification via the bet number operation of the bet number operation means.

With the above configuration, feature C6, in which an update notification is made via a bet number operation in the replay state, does not apply to all replay results, but only to some (specific replay results). By doing so, the bet number is set as is when the replay state is set, so it is assumed that an update notification would normally be made without the bet number operation. By making an update notification via a bet number operation, it is possible to give the impression that the replay state has not been set, making it difficult to distinguish a specific replay result from the first result as a minor win result. This effectively increases the interest in gameplay, as players determine whether or not the state of the bet number notification means has changed over a specific period of time.

Feature C8. The bet number notification means executes the bet number corresponding notification by a specific notification means,
a second bet number informing means (a function of executing a bet process by the main control device 101) for informing a bet number corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a predetermined informing means (a bet display unit 75) different from the specific informing means;
The gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C7 is characterized in that the second bet number notification means is equipped with a specific second bet number notification means (a function of executing standby processing of the BET display unit 75 by the main control unit 101) that, in the first specific situation, ends the notification of the bet number corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery that results in the first result when a predetermined period has elapsed, while, in the second specific situation, can continue the notification of the bet number corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery that results in the second result even after the predetermined period has elapsed.

With the above configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the first and second results not only based on whether or not the bet number notification by the bet number notification means continues, but also based on whether or not the bet number notification by the second bet number notification means continues. This increases the number of decision-making options available in games where the outcome is determined based on whether or not the bet number notification or bet number notification continues, making it possible to appropriately increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature C9. The specific notification means is set to be more easily distinguishable by the player than the predetermined notification means,
A gaming machine described in feature C8, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the timing at which the outcome can be determined based on whether or not the bet amount notification by a specific notification means with higher discrimination continues arrives earlier. This makes it possible to optimally play games in which the outcome is determined based on whether or not the notification continues.

The inventions described in Features C1 to C9 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features C1 to C9 above address the following background art: "There is a need to improve the entertainment value of gaming in the gaming machines exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features C1 to C9 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined upper limit;
bet amount operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57) for performing an operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process or a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
Equipped with
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the number of bets set when the bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set based on the operation of the bet number operation means, whereas when the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is not set even when the bet number operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a settlement means (a function of executing medal return processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing settlement of game values in a number corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
A bet amount notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing a bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means on a predetermined bet amount notification means (bet display unit 34);
When the settlement operation means is operated, a specific bet number notification means (a function of executing a pseudo bet effect based on receiving a specific settlement command from the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification by the predetermined bet number notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, the bet amount for a game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, a lottery is held based on the set bet amount, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded.In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, the bet amount for a game can be ascertained through a bet amount notification by the bet amount notification means, so the player can clearly understand that the operation of the bet amount operation means has been accepted and the current bet amount, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In the above configuration, when the settlement operation means is operated, the game value equivalent to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled, and the bet number notification means may issue a bet number notification based on the operation of the settlement operation means. The settlement operation means is generally operated when ending a game. However, as in the above configuration, by issuing a specific notification from the predetermined bet number notification means when an attempt is made to end a game, it is possible to inform the player that the game should not be ended, such as when the game bet number has been set. This makes it possible to effectively avoid events that could be disadvantageous to the player and optimize the progress of the game.

Feature D2: When a bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the bet number notification means terminates the bet number corresponding notification that has been executed until the bet number is set, and then executes the bet number corresponding notification that corresponds to the current bet number,
A gaming machine described in feature D1, characterized in that when the settlement operation means is operated, the specific bet number notification means is capable of terminating the bet number corresponding notification that was being executed before the settlement operation means was operated, and then executing the specific notification.

With the above configuration, a new bet is set based on the operation of the settlement operation means, and it is possible to impress upon the player that after settlement, the next game can be played without the need to set a new bet. This can dissuade players from ending their game by settling.

Feature D3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a re-game result is set as a bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means, which is a bonus that is set to a re-game state in which the player can again take the lottery by the lottery means with the same number of bets as the current number of bets,
A gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the specific bet number notification means is configured to execute a bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play state as the specific notification when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-play state.

With the above configuration, if the result of a game is a replay result, the game enters a replay state in which a new lottery can be played with the same number of bets as the lottery that resulted in the replay result. If the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state, the number of bets set in the replay state is notified as a bet number notification. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players from ending their games despite being set to the replay state, resulting in a disadvantage to them.

Feature D4. A gaming machine as described in Feature D3, wherein the settlement means is capable of settling game value equivalent to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state.

In configurations like the one described above, where settlement is possible by operating the settlement operation means even in the replay state, it is easy for the inconvenience of gameplay ending without playing the replay state. In this regard, as with feature D3, a specific notification is issued based on the operation of the settlement operation means, making it easier for the player to realize that the game is in the replay state, reducing the possibility of the player suffering a disadvantage.

Feature D5. A gaming machine as described in Feature D3 or Feature D4, wherein the settlement means is capable of settling gaming value, including gaming value corresponding to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the re-play state has not been set.

With the above configuration, if the settlement operation means is operated when the replay state has not been set, settlement will be carried out, including the set bet amount. In this case, although no bet amount notification is made by the specific bet amount notification means, if the player wishes to continue playing after settlement, it is necessary to set a new bet amount, and the player is unlikely to suffer any disadvantage if they simply end their game. Therefore, by using the above configuration, the strangeness of a specific notification being made when the settlement operation means is operated is highlighted, making it easier for the player to notice that a specific notification has been made at the time of settlement. This makes it less likely that the player will suffer any disadvantage.

Feature D6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D5, characterized in that it is equipped with a liquidation limiting means (a function that does not perform liquidation processing until the liquidation operation counter operated by the main control device 101 reaches a specific number) that can limit the execution of liquidation of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the liquidation operation means is operated.

With the above configuration, even if the settlement operation means is operated, the settlement of virtual game value may be limited by the settlement limiting means. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that settlement is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, including game value corresponding to the already set bet amount, even if a bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the set bet amount is issued as a specific notification, there will be no contradiction between the bet amount corresponding notification and the bet amount. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific notification to support the decision to continue playing without reducing the reliability of the specific notification.

Feature D7: The liquidation limiting means can limit the execution of payout of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the liquidation operation means,
The gaming machine described in feature D6 is characterized in that the settlement means is configured to execute settlement of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value memory means based on operations of the settlement operation means that exceed the specific number.

The above configuration achieves the effect of feature D6 while eliminating the inconvenience of being unable to settle the virtual gaming value stored in the virtual gaming value storage means even when the player wishes to do so.

Feature D8: The liquidation limiting means can limit the execution of liquidation of game value corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the liquidation operating means until a predetermined period (third transition period) has elapsed since at least the end of the previous game,
A gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7, characterized in that the settlement means is configured to execute settlement of game value equivalent to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on operation of the settlement operation means after the specified period has elapsed.

The above configuration achieves the effect of feature D6 while eliminating the inconvenience of being unable to settle the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means despite wanting to do so. In particular, by preventing settlement even if the settlement operation means is operated until a predetermined period has passed, even a player who constantly taps the settlement operation means repeatedly when settling can understand that it is not time to end their game by the fact that settlement is not being performed.

Feature D9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a re-game result is set as a bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means, which is a bonus that is set to a re-game state in which the player can again take the lottery by the lottery means with the same number of bets as the current number of bets,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the specific bet number notification means is configured to, when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-play state set based on a specific re-play result as the re-play result, execute a bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play state as the specific notification, while, when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-play state set based on a predetermined re-play result different from the specific re-play result as the re-play result, not execute a bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play state as the specific notification.

With the above configuration, if the game result is a replay result, the game enters a replay state in which a new lottery can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the lottery that resulted in the replay result. However, if the settlement operation means is operated in a replay state triggered by a specific replay result, the number of bets set in the replay state is notified as a bet-based notification. In this case, even if the settlement operation means is operated in a replay state triggered by a specific replay result that differs from the specific replay result, no bet-based notification is made. This limits the situations in which a bet-based notification is made when the settlement operation means is operated, highlighting the strangeness of the bet-based notification and making it easier for players to notice.

Feature D10. When the settlement means settles the virtual game value, a settlement notification means (a function of executing a return performance process by the display control device 81) executes a settlement notification by a predetermined notification means;
When a specific notification is executed by the specific bet number notification means, a limiting means (a function for executing a process to output a sound effect at the time of return after the pseudo bet presentation by the display control device 81, or to execute a pseudo bet presentation after the settlement, as shown in FIG. 92) capable of executing a limiting process for either the specific notification or the settlement notification;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that it is equipped with:

The above configuration, which issues a specific notification when virtual gaming value is settled to the settlement means, effectively eliminates inconveniences in processing and presentation caused by overlapping of the settlement notification at the time of settlement with the specific notification.

Feature D11. A gaming machine as described in Feature D10, wherein the settlement notification means is capable of executing the settlement notification for a period longer than the period until the specific notification is completed.

With the above configuration, even if the liquidation notification is restricted in the configuration of feature D10, there is still room for a liquidation notification to be sent after a specific notification has been completed. This makes it possible to eliminate overlap between liquidation notifications and specific notifications without losing the significance of making it easier to identify fraudulent activity by sending a liquidation notification.

The inventions described in Features D1 to D11 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features D1 to D11 address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features D1 to D11 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that executes start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and executes stop drive control to stop rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing medal insertion response processing, first operation response processing, second operation response processing, etc. by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for the game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means, a bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time presentation setting process by the display control device 81) executes a specific notification (a bet process presentation) and then executes a bet number notification (a bet corresponding presentation) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means by a specific notification means;
A start notification means (a function of executing a start performance setting process by the display control device 81) that executes a start notification by the specific notification means or a notification means different therefrom when the start operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by having a specific processing means (a function of executing processing to delay the push order notification presentation by the display control device 81) that executes specific processing that can limit the start notification by the start notification means when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed.

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operating means, a lottery for that game is conducted, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operating means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, the bet amount for the game is set when the bet amount operating means is operated, and after a specific notification, a bet amount notification corresponding to the game bet amount is issued by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the start operating means may be operated during the execution of a specific notification, and rotation of the rotating body may begin based on that operation. In such a case, there is a high possibility that the start notification and processing for the rotation will overlap with the specific notification and processing for the specific notification, raising concerns about an increase in processing load and the possibility of player confusion due to overlapping notifications and processing.

The above configuration therefore includes a specific processing means that executes specific processing that can limit the start notification when the start operating means is operated while the specific notification is being executed. This eliminates overlap between the start notification for the start of rotation and the specific notification, as well as overlap between the processing for the start notification and the processing for the specific notification. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly.

Feature E2. A gaming machine according to Feature E1, characterized in that when the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means, the specific notification by the bet amount notification means is executed in the same notification manner as when the specific processing is not performed.

With the above configuration, when a specific process that restricts the start of a notification is performed, the notification mode of a specific notification that has already started is not changed. This eliminates the need for complex processing such as changing a notification that is currently being executed, making it possible to avoid an increase in processing load.

Feature E3. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1 or Feature E2, wherein the specific processing means is configured to perform the specific processing when the situation in which the start notification means issues the start notification based on operation of the start operation means is the specific situation, and not to perform the specific processing when the situation in which the start notification means issues the start notification based on operation of the start operation means is a situation different from the specific situation.

With the above configuration, if the situation in which a start notification is actually issued based on the operation of the start operating means is a specific situation, specific processing is performed, but if the situation in which the start notification is issued is not a specific situation, specific processing is not performed. By doing this, even in a configuration in which there is a discrepancy between the timing when the start operating means is operated and the timing when the start notification is issued, it is possible to effectively avoid overlapping between the start notification and the specific notification.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, wherein the specific processing means does not execute the specific processing even if the operation of the start operation means is executed in the specific situation, if a predetermined start notification (specific role notification effect) by the start notification means based on the operation of the start operation means is executed in a situation different from the specific situation.

By using the above configuration, if there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the start operating means and the execution timing of the start notification, it is possible to prevent specific processing from being performed even in situations where the start notification does not overlap with the specific notification, thereby eliminating the execution of unnecessary processing.

Feature E5. The start notification means can execute a first start notification (push order notification effect) and a second start notification (specific role notification effect) as the start notification,
a start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the start drive control was started (a function for executing a process of waiting for the start of rotation until a wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 has elapsed);
A gaming machine as described in feature E4, characterized in that if the start operation means is operated before the specific period has elapsed, the start notification means executes the first start notification when the start operation means is operated, and executes the second start notification when the start drive control is initiated.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E4, and by varying the timing of the start notification before and after the passage of a specific period, known as a wait period, it is possible to fully utilize the function of each start notification.

Feature E6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, a first result winning can be achieved, and when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, an operation mode result (push order role) is set such that a second result winning can be achieved which is different from the first result;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the operation mode result, a mode notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
A gaming machine described in feature E5, wherein the first start notification includes the mode notification by the mode notification means.

As in the above configuration, when a winning operation results in a different winning outcome depending on whether the first or second operation mode is used, more careful operation of the stop operation means is required, and so there is great significance in executing the mode notification before the lapse of a specific period, known as a waiting period. However, even if there is an overlap with the specific notification of the bet number corresponding to the notification, this does not necessarily need to be prioritized. By doing as described above, the mode notification can be started before the lapse of the specific period, encouraging more careful operation while also making it possible to effectively avoid the sense of incongruity caused by overlapping effects.

Feature E7. As the operation mode result, a specific operation mode result (push order bell) is set in which the benefit to the player is different between the benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means when the first result is won and the benefit to the player is different between the benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means when the second result is won,
The gaming machine described in feature E6 is characterized in that the specific processing means is equipped with a means for preventing the specific processing from being executed if the first start notification is based on the result of the specific operation mode.

The purpose of performing the first start operation as a mode notification before the elapse of a specific period, known as a waiting period, is primarily to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. However, as in the above configuration, when a mode notification results in a specific operation mode in which the player's benefit varies depending on the winning result, the mode notification is not restricted even if it overlaps with the specific notification, thereby making it possible to optimally guarantee the player's benefit.

Feature E8. As the operation mode result, a predetermined operation mode result (normal rep A to C) is set in which the benefit to the player is the same between the benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means when the first result is won and the benefit to the player is the benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means when the second result is won,
A gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7, characterized in that the specific processing means executes the specific processing when the first start notification is based on the result of the specified operation mode.

The purpose of performing the first start operation as a pattern notification before the elapse of the specific period known as the wait period is primarily to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. As with the above configuration, for pattern notifications that result in a predetermined operation pattern that benefits the player regardless of whether they result in a win, by limiting pattern notifications that overlap with specific notifications, it is possible to eliminate overlaps between specific notifications and start notifications to the extent that they do not disadvantage the player.

Feature E9: When the start operation means is operated, specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that executes specific drive control to perform a game effect using each of the rotating bodies for a specific period of time;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed, and the specific drive control is executed by the specific drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, it is equipped with a second specific processing means (a function of executing a process to switch the bet process presentation to a bet-compatible presentation based on a first freeze command by the display control device 81) that executes a second specific processing that can limit the specific notification.

In the above configuration, when a specific drive control is executed as a start notification, which is a so-called freeze effect in which a game effect using a rotating body is performed based on the operation of the start operating means, if such specific drive control overlaps with the specific notification, the specific notification is restricted rather than the specific drive control. Generally, the specific drive control as the freeze effect described above is an effect that relatively heightens the expectation of a jackpot, and by doing so, it is possible to effectively avoid restricting the execution of the specific drive control, which is likely to attract the player's attention, due to it overlapping with the specific notification.

The inventions described in Features E1 to E9 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features E1 to E9 above address the following background art: "There is a need to improve the entertainment value of gaming in the gaming machines exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of Features A1 to A20, Features B1 to B15, Features C1 to C9, Features D1 to D11, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, and Features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the above Features E1 to E9, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that executes start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and executes stop drive control to stop rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process and a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification (bet process effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet number setting means;
a start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the start of the start drive control (a function for executing a process of waiting for the start of rotation until a wait time in the rotation start process by the main control device 101 has elapsed);
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to make the specific notification a first notification mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the specific situation in which the bet number setting means sets the bet number after the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the specific result has stopped occurs before the specific period has elapsed, while making the specific notification a second notification mode different from the first notification mode when the specific situation occurs after the specific period has elapsed or when the specific notification is executed across the specific period (a gaming machine characterized by a function that, in the specific re-play bet presentation setting process by the display control device 81, switches to a bet-compatible presentation after the wait period has elapsed, or performs a re-play bet presentation before the wait period has elapsed, and performs a consecutive bet presentation after the wait period has elapsed).

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operating means, a lottery for that game is held, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position by operating the stop operating means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, the start drive control and the start drive control are executed at intervals of at least a specific period, thereby limiting the number of games that can be executed per unit time and optimizing game play.

In such a configuration where a so-called wait, such as a specific period, is specified, it is possible to set the number of bets and accept operation of the start operating means in preparation for the start of rotation before the specific period has elapsed, but even if preparations are made before the start of rotation, the rotation itself will ultimately begin after the specific period has elapsed, and any effects associated with the start of rotation will not be performed until the start of rotation.

In the above configuration, if the bet amount is set before the specific period has elapsed, the specific notification corresponding to that bet amount is made in the first notification mode, and if the bet amount is set after the specific period has elapsed or if the specific notification is made across the specific period, the specific notification is made in the second notification mode.In other words, the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the bet amount is changed depending on the elapsed time of the specific period.For example, if the bet amount is set before the specific period has elapsed, a more flashy specific notification than usual can be made, making it possible to use the waiting time to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Not only that, by differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification before and after the specific period has elapsed, the specific notification can be made relatively slowly before the specific period has elapsed, but completed relatively quickly when rotation begins as the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the effects and processing at the start of rotation from overlapping with the specific notification, which can be expected to reduce processing load and prevent player confusion by eliminating overlapping effects.

As a result of the above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play games in a convenient manner.

Feature F2. A gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the second notification mode is a mode in which the execution of at least some of the specific notifications in the first notification mode is restricted.

As described above, by limiting the execution of at least some of the specific notifications in the first notification mode after a specific period has elapsed or when the specific period is crossed, it becomes clear that the first notification mode is more flashy and offers a wider variety of notifications than the second notification mode. It also becomes clear that when the second notification mode is executed, the processing load can be reduced and overlap with the effects at the start of rotation can be eliminated. This makes it possible to optimally achieve the effect of feature E1.

Feature F3. The specific notification means is
When the specific notification is made, the specific notification is made by including a first specific notification (lighting up effect) and a second specific notification (betting sound effect) different from the first specific notification,
A gaming machine described in feature F2, characterized in that the specific notification is executed in a mode including the first specific notification and the second specific notification as the first notification mode, and in a mode including the first specific notification but not the second specific notification as the second notification mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F2, and in particular, as a configuration for restricting at least some notifications, by making specific notifications in a manner in which the execution of the second specific notification out of the first and second specific notifications is restricted after a specific period has elapsed, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in processing load caused by restricting the execution of all specific notifications.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect.

The above configuration is a specific example of Feature F3. In particular, display effects tend to require more complex processing and larger amounts of data to set than sound effects. However, by continuing to execute the display effect for the first specific notification as is and not executing the sound effect for the second specific notification when a specific period serving as a wait period has elapsed, as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of Feature F1 without complicating processing. Furthermore, while overlap between the specific notification and the effect at the start of rotation can be tolerated if the display effects are executed in different areas, it is considered that the strangeness of multiple sounds being output mixed with each other can be quite large when sound effects are used. By doing so, it is possible to seamlessly eliminate overlap with the effect at the start of rotation.

Feature F5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F4, wherein the specific notification means includes means for executing the specific notification in the first notification mode (a function for executing a normal replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the situation in which the bet number setting means sets a bet number after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result has stopped is after the specific period has elapsed or when the specific notification is executed across the specific period.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific notification is made in the first notification mode when the bet number is set after a specific result but before the specific period has elapsed, the first notification mode may also be made after the specific period has elapsed or across a specific period. In this way, assuming that a specific notification in the first notification mode may be made regardless of the elapse of the specific period, it is possible to make a specific notification in the first notification mode, which is different from the second notification mode, after a specific result but before the specific period has elapsed, and this can be accepted without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, by using the above configuration, the first notification mode is not a notification mode exclusive to specific results, but is also executed for predetermined results, making it possible to reduce the amount of stored data while changing the notification mode of the specific notification before and after the specific period following the specific result.

Feature F6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F5, wherein the specific notification means includes means for executing the specific notification in the second notification mode (a function for executing processing to set a consecutive bet effect by the display control device 81) when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the situation in which the bet number setting means sets a bet number after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result has stopped occurs before the specific period has elapsed.

With the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific notification is made in the second notification mode when the number of bets is set after a specific result and after a specific period has elapsed, or when the specific period has elapsed, it is possible for the specific notification to be made in the second notification mode even before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, assuming that a specific notification in the second notification mode may be made regardless of the elapse of the specific period, it is possible for the specific notification to be made in the second notification mode, which is different from the first notification mode, after a specific result and after the specific period has elapsed, and this can be accepted without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, by using the above configuration, the second notification mode is not a notification mode exclusive to specific results, but is also executed for predetermined results, making it possible to reduce the amount of stored data while changing the notification mode of the specific notification before and after the specific period following the specific result.

Feature F7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F6, characterized in that the notification period required for the specific notification is set to be shorter in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode.

With the above configuration, the specific notification is made in the first notification mode, which has a relatively long notification period, before the specific period has elapsed and the rotation of the rotating body has begun. However, when the rotation of the rotating body has begun after the specific period has elapsed, the specific notification is made in the second notification mode, which has a relatively short notification period. This allows the specific notification to be tailored to the actual progress of the game.

Feature F8. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount up to a predetermined specific amount;
It has a plurality of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c),
The specific notification means is configured to execute the specific notification by switching a number of notification units corresponding to the number of bets among the plurality of notification units from a non-notification state to a notification state,
A gaming machine described in feature F7, characterized in that after a predetermined notification unit is switched to the notification state, the waiting period until the next notification unit after the predetermined notification unit is switched to the notification state is set to be shorter in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F7. As described above, by varying the intervals at which multiple notification units are sequentially set to the notification state, it is possible to achieve a longer or shorter notification period. This makes it possible to achieve the first notification mode and the second notification mode with a relatively simple configuration, thereby reducing the amount of stored data.

The inventions described in Features F1 to F8 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features F1 to F8 above address the following background art: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated after medals have been bet as gaming value, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features F1 to F8 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that executes start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and executes stop drive control to stop rotation of the corresponding rotating body when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing medal insertion response processing, first operation response processing, second operation response processing, etc. by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for the game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A bet number notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification (bet process effect) when a bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means, and executes a bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34);
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a replay result and a picture combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, a replay setting means (a function of executing a replay setting process by the main control device 101) executes a replay process that enables a replay by the lottery means to be drawn again in a replay state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets on which the lottery by the lottery means that resulted in the replay result is set;
Equipped with
The bet number operation means includes a first bet number operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56) and a second bet number operation means (a medal insertion slot 45, a second credit insertion switch 57),
When the replay process is performed based on a specific replay result (specific replay result), a first specific notification means (a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute the specific notification in a first notification mode based on the bet number operation of the first bet number operation means;
When the replay process is performed based on the specific replay result (specific replay result), a second specific notification means (a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) is capable of executing the specific notification in a second notification mode (single bet effect) different from the first notification mode based on the bet number operation of the second bet number operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operation means, a lottery is held for that game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in an active position based on operation of the stop operation means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, when a bet operation is performed using the bet operation means, a bet is set, and after a specific notification, a bet corresponding to the set bet is issued. Therefore, not only can the player know the bet number set based on their own bet operation from the bet corresponding notification, but the specific notification also allows them to know that their bet operation has been accepted, making it possible to prevent unnecessary bet operations.

Furthermore, when a specific replay result is achieved and replay processing is performed, a bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay processing is made based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount operation means. Even in this case, since a specific notification is made before the bet amount notification, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation.

Furthermore, by differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification between when a bet operation is performed by the first bet operation means of the bet operation means and when a bet operation is performed by the second bet operation means of the bet operation means after a specific replay result is won, it is also possible to make the notification mode correspond to the normal bet operation of each bet operation means. In this way, even for replay results that result in replay processing, the game can proceed in the same manner as play after other small win results or loss results. Furthermore, by taking advantage of the fact that the impression given to the player is similar to that after other small win results or loss results but different from that after a replay result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other small win results or loss results, for example, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature G2. The bet number setting means is configured to set a first number of bets when a bet number operation is performed by the first bet number operation means, and to set a second number of bets different from the first number when a bet number operation is performed by the second bet number operation means;
The first notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification that causes the first number of bet number corresponding notifications to be made,
A gaming machine described in feature G1, characterized in that the second notification mode is a specific notification mode in which the second number of notifications corresponding to the bet number is made.

With the above configuration, even after a bet has already been set, the player can be given the impression that, as a replay state following a specific replay result, they can operate the first bet operation means to set a first bet, or the second bet operation means to set a second bet. This helps give the player the impression that a specific replay result is treated the same as other minor wins or losing results, which can help increase interest in the game.

Feature G3: When the specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, a bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
When the specific notification of the second notification mode is executed by the second specific notification means, a bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets is made (a function of executing a single bet effect setting process based on a specific input command or a specific second operation command in a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, when the first bet number operation means or the second bet number operation means is operated in the replay state after a specific replay result, not only the notification mode of the specific notification but also the bet number corresponding notification will be notified in a manner that corresponds to the normal bet number. This prevents the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation, such as the specific notifications leading up to the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to each bet number operation means, but the bet number corresponding notification itself corresponding to the bet number set in the specific replay state.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to Feature G3, characterized in that it comprises means for switching the bet number corresponding notification to the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state when the start operation means is operated in a situation where the specific notification of the first notification mode by the first specific notification means is executed and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets is being made, or in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode by the second specific notification means is executed and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets is being made (a function for executing processing for a bet corresponding presentation in a pseudo bet presentation by the display control device 81; see FIG. 85(c)).

The above configuration makes it possible to issue pseudo bet amount notifications corresponding to the operation of each bet amount operation means when the bet amount has already been set for the replay state, but when the start operation means is operated, the notification switches to the bet amount corresponding to the bet amount set for the replay state. This prevents the player from being unable to grasp the bet amount offered by the current lottery means even though rotation of the rotating body has begun.

Feature G5. A gaming machine as set forth in Feature G3 or Feature G4, characterized in that it is equipped with means for switching the bet number-based notification to the bet number-based notification corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state when the start operation means is operated while the specific notification of the first notification mode is being executed by the first specific notification means, or while the specific notification of the second notification mode is being executed by the second specific notification means (a function for executing processing to switch to a bet-based presentation during a bet process presentation in a pseudo-bet presentation by the display control device 81; see FIG. 85(c)).

The above configuration makes it possible to issue pseudo bet number notifications corresponding to the operation of each bet number operation means when the bet number has already been set for the replay state. However, if the start operation means is operated before the pseudo bet number notification is issued, the notification will switch to the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number set for the replay state. This prevents the player from being unable to grasp the bet number offered by the current lottery means even though rotation of the rotating body has begun.

Feature G6: The specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification including a first specific notification (lighting effect) and a second specific notification (bet sound effect) different from the first specific notification,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the specific notification in the first notification mode by the first specific notification means is a mode that includes the first specific notification and the second specific notification, while the specific notification in the second notification mode by the second specific notification means is a mode that does not include the first specific notification but includes the second specific notification.

With the above configuration, the difference between the first and second notification modes is whether or not the first specific notification is included. This makes it possible to expect the excellent effects of feature G1 with a relatively simple configuration that simply differentiates whether or not some of the specific notifications are executed.

Feature G7. A game value input means (medal input port 45) into which game values are input by the player;
a game value input determining means (inserted medal detection sensor 45a) for determining that game value has been input into the game value input means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that when the gaming value input grasping means grasps that gaming value has been input, it grasps that a bet number operation has been executed by the second bet number operation means.

With the above configuration, when a player inserts gaming value in a replay state set based on a specific replay result, the second bet number operation means is deemed to have been operated, and a specific notification is executed in the second notification mode. In other words, this configuration allows the insertion of gaming value even in a replay state based on a specific replay result, and furthermore, by treating it as if the insertion of said gaming value even allows the setting of the bet number, it can help give the player the impression that the specific replay result is equivalent to other minor winning results, etc.

Feature G8. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) is provided for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined upper limit,
When a first number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet number set when the first bet number operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the first number of bet numbers is set based on the operation of the first bet number operation means,
The gaming machine described in feature G7 is characterized in that, when the re-play processing is performed based on the specific re-play result, the second specific notification means increases the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value memory means based on the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means, and is capable of executing the specific notification by the second notification mode.

With the above configuration, when game value is inserted from the game value insertion means in a replay state based on a specific replay result, not only is a specific notification performed using a pseudo second notification mode, but the number of values stored in the virtual game value storage means can also be increased. This makes it seem as if it is possible to insert virtual game value and set the number of bets in a specific replay state, but it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as wasting game value due to such a pseudo specific notification.

Feature G9. The bet number set by the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means may be different from the bet number set in the re-play state based on the specific re-play result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that when the re-play processing is performed based on the specific re-play result, the second specific notification means executes the specific notification in the second notification mode based on the bet number operation by the second bet number operation means, and executes the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-play processing (a function of executing processing to perform a bet corresponding presentation based on a specific input command in the specific re-play bet presentation setting processing by the display control device 81, see Figure 85 (d)), and when the bet number corresponding notification is being executed, if a bet number operation is further executed by the second bet number operation means, it is possible to execute a predetermined notification (credit increase sound effect, Figure 85 (a)) without updating the bet number corresponding notification.

According to the above configuration, when a bet operation is performed by the second bet operation means in a re-play state based on a specific re-play result, a bet number-related notification is made along with a specific notification by the second notification mode, and when a bet operation is further performed by the second bet operation means, only a predetermined notification is made without updating the bet number-related notification. In this way, when a re-play state based on a specific re-play result is reached, a bet number-related notification is made that corresponds to the bet number set in the re-play state, rather than the bet number resulting from the bet operation by the second bet operation means, along with a specific notification resulting from the bet operation by the second bet operation means. This makes it possible to clearly understand that a bet operation by the second bet operation means has been accepted, while also allowing the player to understand the correct bet number. Furthermore, if the bet amount corresponding notification is not updated when a second bet amount operation is performed using the second bet amount operation means, the impression that the bet amount corresponding notification is legitimate can be reinforced, and since a predetermined notification is also made when the bet amount operation is performed, it is possible to make the player understand that the bet amount operation has been accepted even without an update. This makes it possible to effectively eliminate inconsistencies and inconveniences in notifications regarding bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means when the bet amount set by the second bet amount operation means differs from the bet amount in the re-play state.

The inventions described in Features G1 to G9 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming value and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reel stop corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features G1 to G9 above address the following background art: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming value and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reel stop corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

The technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features G1 to G9 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that executes start drive control to start rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and executes stop drive control to stop rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
bet amount operation means (a first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57) for performing an operation to set the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing a first operation response process or a second operation response process by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a medal payout process or a replay setting process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be seen via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific notification means (a function for executing a process for performing a bet process effect or the like in the bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification (a bet time effect such as a bet process effect) when the bet number operation means is operated;
A bet amount notification means (a function of executing a bet time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes a bet amount corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means by a predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific means (a function that executes processing to set a second freeze flag when the start operation means is operated during a betting process presentation in a replay state based on a specific replay result in a freeze lottery processing by the main control unit 101) that can restrict the execution of the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed.

In this configuration, a game is started by operating the start operating means, a lottery is held for that game, and a bonus corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops in a valid position based on the operation of the stop operating means. In this so-called slot machine gaming machine, when the bet amount operating means is operated, the game bet amount is set, a specific notification is executed, and a bet amount-related notification corresponding to the game bet amount is issued by a predetermined notification means. In this case, it is anticipated that, for example, the start operating means may be operated during the execution of a specific notification, causing the rotation of the rotating body to begin based on that operation. In such a case, the execution of the start drive control for starting that rotation is restricted. This makes it possible to effectively avoid an incident in which the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body overlap, and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by overlapping effects or processing.

Feature H2. A specific drive control means (a function of executing the second freeze effect by the rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific drive control to perform a specific action (second freeze effect) as a game effect using the rotating body is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific drive control means is capable of executing the specific drive control when the execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specification means.

With the above configuration, if the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body coincide, a specific action is executed as a game effect using the rotating body, such as a so-called freeze effect. By using such a specific action, it is possible to accept the overlapping of the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body without feeling strange, and it is possible to draw attention to the movement of the rotating body even while waiting for the rotation of the rotating body to begin, thereby ideally increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The above configuration may be supplemented with the following configuration: "The drive control means is capable of executing the start drive control after the specific drive control by the specific drive control means has ended."

Feature H3: An execution lottery means (a function of executing a freeze lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs an execution lottery to determine whether the specific drive control is to be performed by the specific drive control means based on the lottery result by the lottery means is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature H2 is characterized in that the specification means is capable of performing the specific drive control even if the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means is different from the result corresponding to executing the specific drive control.

In the above configuration, in which the lottery for executing a specific action is conducted based on the results of a lottery drawn by a lottery means, even if the lottery for executing the specific action is not won, the specific action can be performed if the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body coincide. This makes it clearer that the execution of a specific action when the specific notification and the start of rotation coincide is not a coincidence.

Feature H4. Equipped with an advantage determination means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means executes the advantageous determination so that the result of the advantageous determination is more likely to be a result corresponding to the advantageous event occurring when the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a second result (normal combination) different from the first result,
The gaming machine described in feature H3 is characterized in that the execution lottery means executes the execution lottery so that the result of the execution lottery is more likely to be a result corresponding to executing the specific drive control when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result than when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result.

The above configuration clearly correlates the rate at which a specific action is performed with the rate at which an advantageous event occurs. This makes it possible to take advantage of the player's psychology of anticipating an advantageous event and draw their attention to the occurrence of a specific action. As a result, if a specific action is performed when the specific notification and the start of rotation overlap, the player will accept it without feeling strange and will pay attention with great anticipation.

Feature H5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H2 to H4, wherein the specific notification means is configured to terminate the specific notification before the specific drive control by the specific drive control means terminates (see Figure 83 (d)).

With the above configuration, the specific notification ends before the specific operation ends, which effectively avoids the inconvenience of overlapping between the start drive control and the specific notification even though the start drive control has been restricted to perform the specific operation.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features H2 to H5, wherein the specific drive control means, when the execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specification means, executes the specific drive control to perform the specific action of stopping the rotating body and delaying the start of rotation of the rotating body by the start drive control.

The above configuration clarifies that the specific action does not involve rotation of the rotating body. This prevents overlap between the specific notification and the action of the rotating body, making it possible to avoid inconveniences caused by overlapping processes.

Feature H7. A first specific drive control means (a function of executing the first freeze effect in the rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a first specific drive control to perform a first specific action (first freeze effect) as a game effect including rotation of the rotating body;
A second specific drive control means (a function of executing the second freeze effect in the rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing the second specific drive control so as to perform a second specific action (a second freeze effect) as a game action that does not include the rotation of the rotating body;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that when the start operation means is operated in the specific situation, a specific restriction means (a function of executing a process to switch the bet process presentation to a bet-compatible presentation based on a first freeze command in a specific re-play bet presentation setting process by the display control device 81) is provided which executes a restriction process that can restrict the specific notification if the first specific drive control is performed by the first specific drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means.

With the above configuration, if the first specific action, including the rotation of the rotating body, and the specific notification overlap, the specific notification side is restricted. In this way, rather than stopping the rotation of the rotating body to prevent the specific notification based on the operation of the bet number operation means, a configuration is adopted that prioritizes the first specific action caused by the rotation of the rotating body, thereby reducing the high load on the drive unit that would be caused by suddenly changing the drive control of the rotating body.

The inventions described in Features H1 to H7 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming value and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features H1 to H7 above address the following background art: "There is a need to improve the entertainment value of gaming in the gaming machines exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

The technical ideas shown in any one of Features A1 to A20, Features B1 to B15, Features C1 to C9, Features D1 to D11, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F8, Features G1 to G9, and Features H1 to H7 can be applied individually to each of the features H1 to H7 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group H described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A through H individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body, 41... start lever as start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as interval indicator, 81... display control device as sub-control board, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for performing a start operation to start the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a bet amount operation means for performing a bet amount operation to set the game value as the bet amount for a game;
a bet amount setting means for setting a bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to award a prize to a player according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, based on the operation of the start operation means;
a granting means for granting a benefit corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means as a gaming value;
a storage means capable of storing the game value awarded by the awarding means;
a settlement operation means for performing a settlement operation of the game value stored in the storage means;
a means for switching the notification mode of the specific notification means from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when the bet number operation is performed;
Equipped with
During the settlement of the game value based on the settlement operation, the notification mode of the specific notification means can be switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode , and even after the notification mode of the specific notification means is switched to the second notification mode, the settlement of the game value that was being executed before the switching continues,
A configuration capable of executing a predetermined notification corresponding to the settlement of the gaming value based on the settlement operation,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the specified notification in a situation where the settlement of the gaming value that was being executed before the switch continues .